San Carlos City Council
January 12, 2026

3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that Electrical items were installed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3.16 SALVAGED EQUIPMENT AND RECYCLED MATERIAL
A. Salvage the following equipment not being reused and return to Owner:

1. Luminaires

2. Receptacles
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 942

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS 26 00 00-13
B. Electrical equipment that cannot be salvaged for reuse, sell/give to recycling company. Recycle following excess, removed, or demolished electrical material:

1. Copper or aluminum conductors, buses.

2. Steel and aluminum from raceways, boxes, enclosures, and housings.

3. Acrylic and glass from luminaire lenses/refractors.

C. Provide separate on-site storage space for recycled and salvaged material. Clearly label space.

D. Confirm additional salvaged equipment and recycled materials in the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 943

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-1
SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Lugs and Pads

2. Wires and Cables

3. Splices

4. Connectors

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Cable insulation test reports in project closeout documentation.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lugs and Pads:

1. Anderson

2. Ilsco

3. Panduit

4. Thomas & Betts

5. 3M

6. Or approved equivalent.

B. Wires and Cables:

1. General:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 944

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-2
a. General Cable
b. Okonite
c. Southwire
d. Encore Wire
e. Or approved equivalent.

C. Splices:

1. Branch Circuit Splices:
a. Ideal
b. 3M Scotchlok
c. Uraseal, Inc.
d. Or approved equivalent.

D. Connectors:

1. Anderson Power Products

2. Burndy

3. Ilsco

4. 3M

5. Thomas & Betts

6. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 LUGS AND PADS
A. Ampacity: Cross-sectional area of pad for multiple conductor terminations to match ampere rating of panelboard bus or equipment line terminals.

B. Copper Pads: Drilled and tapped for multiple conductor terminals.

C. Lugs: Compression type for use with stranded branch circuit or control conductors; mechanical type for use with solid branch and feeder circuit conductors.

2.3 WIRES AND CABLES
A. Building Wires:

1. Copper: Soft-drawn with conductivity of not less than 98 percent IACS at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F). 600 volt rated throughout. Conductors 12 AWG and 10 AWG, solid or stranded. Conductors 8 AWG and larger, stranded. 12 AWG minimum conductor size.

Minimum insulation rating of 90 degrees C. Insulation Type: THHN/THWN-2 or XHHW-2 on roofs.

B. Phase color to be consistent at feeder terminations; A-B-C, top to bottom, left to right, front to back.

C. Color Code Conductors as Follows:

PHASE 208 VOLT WYE 480 VOLT
A Black Brown
B Red Orange
C Blue Yellow
Neutral White Gray or White w/colored strip
Ground Green Green
Isolated Ground Green w/yellow trace N/A
D. MC Cable: Not allowed.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 945

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-3
E. AC Cable (Armored Cable): Not allowed.

F. NMB Cable: Not allowed.

2.4 SPLICES
A. Branch Circuits: Twist on, high temperature, grounding type wing nuts.

1. Ideal Industries Wing-Nut Twist-On Connectors.

2. 3M Scotchlok Twist-On Wire Connectors.

2.5 CONNECTORS
A. Split bolt connectors not allowed.

B. Conductor Branch Circuits: Wire nuts with integral spring connectors for conductors 12 AWG through 8 AWG. Push-in type connectors where conductors are not required to be twisted together are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer instructions and CEC.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA Standard ATS, except Section 4.

2. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA Standard ATS, Section 7.3.2.

3.2 LUGS AND PADS
A. Thoroughly clean surfaces to remove all dirt, oil, grease, or paint.

B. Use torque wrench to tighten per manufacturer's directions.

3.3 WIRES AND CABLES
A. General:

1. Do not install or handle thermoplastic insulated wire and cable in temperatures below -10 degrees C (14 degrees F). Do not handle thermoset insulated wire and cable in temperatures below -40 degrees C (-40 degrees F). All wire and cable must be acclimated to temperatures above freezing for no less than 24 hours prior to installation.

2. Install conductors in raceways having adequate, code size cross-sectional area for wires indicated.

3. Install conductors with care to avoid damage to insulation.

4. Do not apply greater tension on conductors than recommended by manufacturer during installation.

5. Use of pulling compounds is permitted. Clean residue from exposed conductors and raceway entrances after conductor installation. Do not use pulling compounds for installation of conductors connected to GFCI circuit breakers or GFCI receptacles.

6. Conductor Size and Quantity:
a. Install no conductors smaller than 12 AWG unless otherwise shown. b. Provide required conductors for a fully operable system. c. Power Circuits: No. 12 AWG minimum, except as follows:
1) No. 10 AWG for 20A, 120V circuits longer than 60-feet but not exceeding 89-feet.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 946

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-4
2) No. 8 AWG for 20A, 120V circuits longer than 90-feet but not exceeding 139-feet.
d. When exact run lengths are determined for all branch circuits, and prior to installation of the conductors, ensure that the maximum voltage drop, based on 80 percent of the circuit protective device, does not exceed 3 percent. Increase wire size from No. 12 AWG, if necessary, to ensure that the 3 percent voltage drop is not exceeded.

7. Provide dedicated neutrals (one neutral conductor for each phase conductor) in all 120V circuits and all 277V circuits.

B. Conductors in Cabinets:

1. Conductors and cables within panels and cabinets are to be made up in a clean and workmanlike manner.

2. Cable and tree wires in panels and cabinets for power and control. Use plastic ties in panels and cabinets.

3. Tie and bundle feeder conductors in wireways of panelboards.

4. Hold conductors away from sharp metal edges.

C. Homeruns:

1. Do not change intent of branch circuit homeruns without approval. Homeruns for 20A branch circuits may be combined to a maximum of six current carrying conductors including neutral conductors in homeruns. Apply derating factors as required per NEC.

Increase conductor size as needed.

2. MC cable homeruns are not allowed.

D. Identify wire and cable under the provisions of Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems. Identify each conductor with its panel and circuit number as indicated.

E. Exposed cable is not allowed.

F. All cable must be run parallel or perpendicular to building lines and hidden from view when possible. Where installed in tray each power cable is to be identified with Lamacoid nametag engraved with identification of equipment being fed. Tag to be fastened to cable using tie-wraps.

Provide nametag at each floor level.

G. Do not install PVC jacketed cables in return air plenums, unless they are specially rated plenum cables.

3.4 SPLICES
A. Make splices complete and promptly after wire installation. Provide single wire pigtails for luminaire and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for luminaire wire connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails.

B. Make splices for No. 8 and larger wires with mechanically applied pressure type connectors.

Make all taped joints with Scotch 33+ or equal, applied in half-lap layers without stretching to deform. Uraseal splice kits are also acceptable through 250 KCMIL.

C. Remove insulation using industry approved means and methods to ensure all conductors are free of damage upon completion.

3.5 CONNECTORS
A. Install to assure a solid and safe connection.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 947

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19-5
B. Select hand twist connectors for wire size and install tightly on conductors.

C. Install compression connectors using methods and tools recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Do not install stranded conductors under screw terminals unless compression lugs are installed.

E. Do not connect wiring without UL listed connectors that are listed for the purposes.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 948

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1
SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Connectors and Accessories

2. Grounding Conductor

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Test reports of ground resistance for service and separately derived system grounds.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Comply with the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Connectors and Accessories:

1. Burndy Hyground Compression System

2. Erico/Cadweld

3. Amp Ampact Grounding System

4. Pipe Grounding Clamp:
a. Burndy GAR Series
b. O Z Gedney
c. Thomas & Betts
d. Or approved equivalent.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 949

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-2
B. Grounding Conductor

1. General Cable

2. Okonite

3. Southwire

4. Or approved equivalent

2.2 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Grounding Connectors: Hydraulic compression tool applied connectors or exothermic welding process connectors or powder actuated compression tool applied connectors.

B. Pipe Grounding Clamp: Mechanical ground connector with cable parallel or perpendicular to pipe.

2.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft-draw bare stranded copper for wire sizes larger than #10 AWG Bare. Solid copper for wire sizes #10 AWG and smaller.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated, insulation type to match that of associated feeder or branch circuit wiring, size as indicated on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Verify site conditions prior to beginning work.

B. Corrosion inhibitors: Apply a corrosion inhibitor to contact surfaces when making grounding and bonding connections. Use corrosion inhibitor appropriate for protecting a connection between metals used.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA Standard ATS, except Section 4.

D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA Standard AB, Section 7.13.

3.2 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION
A. Raceways:

1. Ground metallic raceway systems. Bond to ground terminal with code size jumper except where code size or larger equipment grounding conductor is included with circuit, use grounding bushing with lay-in lug.

2. Connect metal raceways, which terminate within an enclosure but without mechanical connection to enclosure, by grounding bushings and ground conductor to grounding bus.

3. Install equipment grounding conductor, code size minimum unless noted on drawings, in metallic and nonmetallic raceway systems.

B. Branch Circuits:

1. Provide continuous green insulated copper equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 950

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 26-3

2. Where installed in a continuous solid metallic raceway system and larger sizes are not detailed, provide insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits sized in accordance with the latest adopted edition of NEC Article 250, Table 250- 122.

C. Motors: Install code size equipment grounding conductor to (motor) equipment frame or manufacturer's designated ground terminal.

D. Receptacles: Connect ground terminal of receptacle and associated outlet box to equipment grounding conductor. Self grounding nature of receptacle devices does not eliminate equipment grounding conductor bolted to outlet box.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 951

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-1
SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Anchors, Threaded Rod, and Fasteners

2. Support Channel, Hangers, and Supports

3. Rooftop Conduit Supports

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals not required for this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing support systems, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for code required pipe support, trapeze, equipment hangers/supports, and seismic restraint by a qualified Structural Professional Engineer. a. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide conduit and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with the following:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 952

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-2

1. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment and supports, anchorages and seismic restraints for conduit, cable tray and equipment are not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor is responsible for their design.

2. Connections to structural framing shall not introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

B. Engineered Support Systems: The following support systems to be designed, detailed, and bear the seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of California.

1. Support frames such as conduit racks or stanchions for conduit and equipment which provide support from below.

2. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or structure.

C. Provide channel support systems, for conduits to support multiple conduits capable of supporting combined weight of support systems and system contents.

D. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple conduit capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and system contents.

E. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for conduit and equipment.

F. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be installed for piping and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anchors, Threaded Rod, and Fasteners:

1. Anchor It

2. Epcon System

3. Hilti-Hit System

4. Power Fast System

5. Or approved equivalent.

B. Support Channel, Hangers, and Supports:

1. B-Line

2. Kindorf

3. Superstrut

4. Unistrut

5. Or approved equivalent.

C. Rooftop Conduit Supports:

1. Cooper B-Line Dura-Block Rooftop Support Base

2. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 ANCHORS, THREADED ROD, AND FASTENERS
A. Anchors, Threaded Rod and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

B. Concrete Inserts: Cast in concrete for support fasteners for loads up to 800-pounds.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 953

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-3

3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts.

5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors.

6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of fabricated items; surface-applied fasteners are specified elsewhere.

E. Bolts: Low carbon steel externally and internally threaded fasteners conforming with requirements of ASTM A307; include necessary nuts and plain hardened washers. For structural steel elements supporting mechanical material or equipment from building structural members or connection thereto, use fasteners conforming to ASTM A325.

F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods, and equipment required for fabrication.

2.3 SUPPORT CHANNEL, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and Supports - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit.

1. Channel Material: Carbon steel.

2. Coating: Hot dip galvanized.

B. Pipe Straps: Two-hole galvanized or malleable iron.

C. Luminaire Chain: Carbon steel with zinc plated finish. Rated to minimum 90-pound safe working load.

D. Miscellaneous Metal: Provide miscellaneous metal items specified hereunder, including materials, fabrication, fastenings and accessories required for finished installation, where indicated on Drawings or otherwise not shown on drawings that are necessary for completion of the project. The Contractor is responsible for their design.

1. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

E. Structural Shapes: Where miscellaneous metal items are needed to be fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates, provide members constructed of steel conforming with requirements of ASTM A36 or approved equivalent.

F. Steel Pipe: Provide seamless steel pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, or Grade B. Weight and size required as specified.

G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods, and equipment required for fabrication.

2.4 ROOFTOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Curb base made of 100 percent recycled rubber and polyurethane prepolymer with a uniform load
B. Capacity of 500 pounds per linear foot of support.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 954

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-4
C. UV resistant.

D. Steel Frame: Steel, 14 gauge strut galvanized per ASTM A653 or 12 gauge strut galvanized per ASTM A653 for bridge series.

E. Continuous block channel supports with 1-inch gaps to allow water flow, bridge channel supports, extendable height channel supports and elevated single conduit supports.

F. Attaching Hardware: Zinc-plated threaded rod, nuts and attaching hardware per ASTM B633 fastened directly into rubber material with weather resistant Type 12 lag screws.

G. Provide load distribution plates when required for heavy loads.

H. Finish: Black with safety yellow striping.

I. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabrication - Miscellaneous Metals

1. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate sizes and configurations as indicated on Drawings and otherwise required for proper installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill, countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required. Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates, and similar devices. Hot dipped galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit; where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.

2. Finishes:
a. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings. For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized ferrous metal with one coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas in primer with same material, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified elsewhere. b. Metal in contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials: Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials, provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other coatings specified in these specifications.
c. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

3.2 ANCHORS, THREADED ROD, AND FASTENERS INSTALLATION
A. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for equipment installed.

Supports to withstand four times the weight of equipment it supports.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 955

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-5
B. Do not use other trade's fastening devices as supporting means for luminaires, equipment or materials.

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

D. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item.

E. Securely suspend junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying.

F. Provide seismic bracing per CBC requirements.

G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

H. Use spring lock washers under fastener nuts for strut.

I. Cutting and Drilling

1. Do not drill or cut structural members without prior permission from Architect.

3.3 SUPPORT CHANNEL, HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1.

B. Safety factor of 4 required for every fastening device or support for equipment installed.

Supports to withstand four times the weight of equipment it supports.

C. Verify mounting height of luminaires prior to installation when heights are not detailed.

D. Install vertical support members for equipment and luminaires, straight and parallel to building walls.

E. Install horizontal support members straight and parallel to ceilings or finished floor unless otherwise noted.

F. Provide independent supports to structural member for luminaires, materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls or in void spaces or over suspended ceilings.

G. Do not use other trade's fastening devices as supporting means for luminaires, equipment or materials.

H. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.

I. Do not use supports or fastening devices to support other than one particular item.

J. Support conduits within 18-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections unless more stringently required by CEC.

K. Maximum distance between supports not to exceed 8 foot spacing unless otherwise required by CEC.

L. Support flexible conduits within 12-inches of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets and deflections unless otherwise required by CEC.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 956

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT 26 05 29-6
M. Maximum distance between supports for flexible conduits not to exceed 48-inches spacing unless otherwise required by CEC.

N. Maximum distance between supports for rigid PVC conduits unless otherwise required by CEC is as follows:

1. 1/2-inch or 3/4-inch and 1-inch conduit, 3-feet apart.

2. 1-1/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch and 2-inch conduit, 4-feet apart.

3. 2-1/2-inch and 3-inch conduit, 5-feet apart.

4. 4-inch and 5-inch conduit, 6-feet apart.

5. 6-inch conduit, 7-feet apart.

O. Install strut hangers as instructed by strut manufacturer. Suspend strut hangers as instructed by strut manufacturer for the load, with a maximum spacing of 8-feet on center and within 2-feet of outlet box, cabinet, junction box or other channel raceway termination unless otherwise required by CEC.

P. Securely suspend junction boxes, pull boxes or other conduit terminating housings located above suspended ceiling from floor above or roof structure to prevent sagging and swaying.

Q. Provide seismic bracing per CBC requirements.

R. Where service disconnects are mounted on building exterior, physically attach service disconnect to the building or structure served.

S. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

T. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

3.4 ROOFTOP CONDUIT SUPPORTS INSTALLATION
A. Consult roofing manufacturer for roof membrane compression capacities. If necessary, provide a compatible sheet of roofing material (rubber pad) under rooftop support to disperse concentrated loads and add further membrane protection.

B. Do not use supports that will void roof warranty.

C. Install supports per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

D. Use properly sized clamps to suit conduit sizes.

E. Install supports for rooftop raceways to raise raceways a minimum of 7/8-inches above the roof structure unless otherwise noted.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 957

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-1
SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC)

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

3. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)

4. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)

5. Conduit Fittings
B. Provide a complete system of conduit and fittings, with associated couplings, connectors, and fittings, as shown on Drawings and described in these Specifications.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Section 26 05 29, Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and Equipment

2. Section 26 05 34, Boxes

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Raceway system is defined as consisting of conduit, tubing, duct, and fittings including but not limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, bushings, expansion/deflection fittings, and other components and accessories. Complete electrical raceway installation before starting the installation of conductors and cables.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 958

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC):

1. Allied Tube & Conduit

2. Beck Manufacturing Inc.

3. Picoma

4. Wheatland Tube Company

5. Or approved equivalent.

B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

1. Allied Tube & Conduit

2. Beck Manufacturing WL

3. Picoma

4. Wheatland Tube Company

5. Or approved equivalent.

C. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC):

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc.

2. Electri-Flex Company

3. International Metal Hose

4. Or approved equivalent.

D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc.

2. Electri-Flex Company

3. International Metal Hose

4. Or approved equivalent.

E. Conduit Fittings:

1. Bushings:
a. Insulated Type for Threaded Raceway Without Factory Installed Plastic Throat Conductor Protection:
1) Thomas & Betts 1222 Series
2) O-Z Gedney B Series
3) Or approved Equivalent.

2. Raceway Connectors and Couplings:
a. Thomas & Betts Series
b. O-Z Gedney Series
c. Or approved Equivalent.

3. Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
a. EMT: O-Z Gedney Type TX
b. RMC: O-Z Gedney Type AX, DX and AXDX, Crouse & Hinds XD c. PVC: O-Z Gedney Type DX with PVC adapters, Carlon E945 Series, Kraloy OPEJ Series
d. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A. UL 6, ANSI C80.1. Hot dipped galvanized steel conduit after thread cutting.

1. Fittings: NEMA FB2.10.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 959

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-3

2.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: UL 797, ANSI C80.3; steel galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel, compression type.

2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A. Description: UL 1, interlocked steel construction.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 2.20.

2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Description: UL 360, inner core made from spiral wound strip of heavy gauge, hot dipped galvanized low carbon steel. 3/4-inch through 1-1/4-inch trade sizes to have a square lock core and contain an integral bonding strip of copper. 1-1/2-inch and larger to have fully interlocked core. Jacket material to be moisture, oil, and sunlight resistant flexible PVC.

B. Fittings: NEMA FB 2.20.

2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Bushings:

1. Insulated type for threaded raceway connectors without factory-installed plastic throat conductor protection.

2. Insulated grounding type for threaded raceway connectors.

B. Raceway Connectors and Couplings:

1. Steel connectors, couplings, and conduit bodies, hot-dip galvanized.

2. Connector locknuts to be steel, with threads meeting ASTM tolerances. Locknuts to be hot-dip galvanized.

3. Connector throats (EMT, flexible conduit, metal clad cable and cordset connectors) to have factory installed plastic inserts permanently installed. For normal cable or conductor exiting angles from raceway, the cable jacket or conductor insulation to bear only on plastic throat insert.

4. Steel gland, Tomic or Breagle connectors and couplings are recognized for this Contract as having acceptable raceway to fitting electrical conductance.

5. Set screw connectors and couplings, without integral compression glands, are recognized for this Contract as not having acceptable raceway to fitting electrical conductance. A ground conductor sized per this Specification must be included and bonded within raceway assembly utilizing this type connector or coupling.

C. Provide expansion/deflection fittings for EMT or RMC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Finished Surfaces: Schedule raceway installation to avoid conflict with installed wall and ceiling surfaces. If unavoidable, coordinate work and repairs with Architect.

B. Conduit Size:

1. Minimum Size: 3/4-inch for power and control, unless otherwise noted.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 960

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-4
C. Provide two pull strings/tapes in empty conduits. Types:

1. High-strength, stretch resistant, woven polyester. Factory lubricated to reduce burn- through.

2. Feeders: 5/8-inch, 1,800-pound rated, Greenlee 4436, Mule Tape, Herculine, or approved equivalent.

3. Branch Circuits: 1/2-inch, 1,250-pound rated, Greenlee 4435, Mule Tape, Herculine, or approved equivalent.

4. If fish tape is used for pulling line, fiberglass type to be used. Metal fish tapes not allowed.

5. Secure pull string/tape with minimum 6-feet extended at each end.

6. Install pull string/tape after conduit is joined and glue is dry.

7. Provide caps on ends of empty conduit to be used in future.

8. Label both ends of empty conduits with location of opposite end.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

E. Plan locations of conduit runs in advance of the installation and coordinate with ductwork, plumbing, ceiling and wall construction in the same areas.

F. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

G. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system.

H. Install raceways securely, in neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

I. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101, Standard for Installing Steel Conduits.

J. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

K. Conduit Supports:

1. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

2. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

3. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel.

Provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

4. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports.

5. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

L. Flexible metal conduit length not-to-exceed 6-feet, 3-feet in concealed walls. Provide sufficient slack to reduce the effect of vibration.

M. Install conduit seals at boundaries where ambient temperatures differ by 10 degrees F or more as shown on the drawings. Install seals on warm side of partition.

N. Use suitable caps on spare and empty conduits to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

O. Keep 277/480 volt wiring independent of 120/208 volt wiring. Keep power wiring independent of communication system wiring.

P. Keep emergency system wiring independent of other wiring systems per NEC 700.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 961

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-5
Q. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.

R. Exposed conduits are permitted only in following areas:

1. Mechanical rooms, electrical rooms or spaces where walls, ceilings and floors will not be covered with finished material.

2. Existing walls that are concrete or block construction.

3. Where specifically noted on Drawings.

4. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls, tight to finished surfaces and neatly offset into boxes.

S. Do not install conduits or other electrical equipment in obvious passages, doorways, scuttles or crawl spaces which would impede or block area passage's intended usage.

T. Install continuous conduit and raceways for electrical power wiring.

U. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.

V. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.

W. Keep conduits a minimum of 12-inches away from steam or hot water radiant heating lines (at or above 104 degrees F) or 3-inches away from waste or water lines.

X. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; deburr cut ends.

Y. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

Z. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes in damp and wet locations.

AA. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.

BB. Use factory elbows bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.

CC. Avoid moisture traps.

DD. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control, and expansion joints.

EE. Feeders: Do not combine or change feeder runs.

FF. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

GG. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation and installer.

3.2 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) INSTALLATION
A. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: RMC.

B. Damp Locations: RMC.

C. In areas exposed to mechanical damage: RMC.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 962

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-6
D. For security conduits installed exposed and subject to tampering: RMC.

3.3 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) INSTALLATION
A. Dry Locations:

1. Concealed: EMT.

2. Exposed: EMT.

B. Dry, Protected: EMT.

3.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) INSTALLATION
A. Dry Locations: Motors, recessed luminaires and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration, use flexible metallic conduit.

B. Install 12-inch minimum slack loop on flexible metallic conduit.

3.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) INSTALLATION A. Use PVC coated liquidtight flexible metallic conduit for motors and equipment connections subject to movement or vibration and subjected to any of following conditions: Exterior location, moist or humid atmosphere, corrosive environments, water spray, oil, or grease.

B. Install 12-inch minimum slack loop on liquidtight flexible metallic conduit.

3.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Joints: Assemble conduits continuous and secure to boxes, panels, luminaires and equipment with fittings to maintain continuity. Provide watertight joints where embedded in concrete, below grade or in damp locations. Seal metal conduit with metal thread primer. Rigid conduit connections to be threaded, clean and tight (metal to metal). Threadless connections are not permitted for RMC.

B. Use set screw type fittings only in dry locations. When set screw fittings are utilized provide insulated continuous equipment ground conductor in conduit, from overcurrent protection device to outlet.

C. Use compression fittings in dry locations, damp and rain-exposed locations. Maximum size permitted in damp locations and locations exposed to rain is 2-inches in diameter.

D. Use threaded type fittings in wet locations, and damp or rain-exposed locations where conduit size is greater than 2-inches.

E. Condulets and Conduit Bodies:

1. Do not use condulets and conduit bodies in conduits in feeders 100 amp and larger.

F. Sleeves and Chases - Floor, Ceiling and Wall Penetrations: Provide necessary conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceilings, or walls.

G. Expansion Joints:

1. Provide conduits crossing expansion joints where cast in concrete with expansion- deflection fittings, installed per manufacturer's recommendations.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 963

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
RACEWAYS 26 05 33-7

2. Secure conduits 3-inches and larger to building structure on opposite sides of a building expansion joint with an expansion-deflection fitting across joint installed per manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Provide conduits less than 3-inches where not cast in concrete with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of expansion joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits 3-inch and larger may be installed.

4. Verify expansion/deflection requirements with Structural Engineer prior to installation.

H. Seismic Joints:

1. No conduits cast in concrete allowed to cross seismic joint.

2. Provide conduits with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of seismic joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. Prior to installation, verify with Architect that 15-inches is adequate for designed movement, and if not, increase this length as required.

3. Provide conduits less than 3-inches where not cast in concrete with junction boxes securely fastened on both sides of expansion joint, connected together with 15-inches of slack (minimum of 15-inches longer than straight line length) flexible conduit and copper green ground bonding jumper. In lieu of this flexible conduit, an expansion-deflection fitting, as indicated for conduits 3-inches and larger may be installed.

I. Provide rigid conduit coupling flush with surface of slab or wall for conduit stubbed in concrete slab or wall to serve electrical equipment or an outlet under table or to supply shop tool, etc.

Provide plug where conduit is to be used in future.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 964

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-1
SECTION 26 05 34
BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Outlet Boxes

2. Junction Boxes

3. Box Extension Adapter

4. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes
B. Provide electrical boxes and fittings for a complete installation. Include but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, bushings, locknuts and other necessary components.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Section 26 05 33, Raceways

2. Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Outlet Boxes:

1. Hubbell

2. Thomas & Betts

3. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds

4. Or approved equivalent.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 965

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-2
B. Junction Boxes:

1. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds

2. Hoffman

3. Or approved equivalent.

C. Box Extension Adapter:

1. Hubbell

2. Thomas & Betts

3. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds

4. Or approved equivalent.

D. Weatherproof Outlet Boxes:

1. Legrand (Pass & Seymour)

2. Hubbell

3. Thomas & Betts

4. Eaton/Crouse-Hinds

5. Intermatic

6. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 OUTLET BOXES
A. Luminaire Outlet: 4-inch octagonal box, 1-1/2-inches deep with 3/8-inch luminaire stud if required. Provide raised covers on bracket outlets and on ceiling outlets.

B. Device Outlet: Installation of one or two devices at common location, minimum 4-inches square, minimum 1-1/2-inches deep for non-USB type devices. Installation of one or two devices at common locations, minimum 4-inches square, minimum 2-inches deep for USB type devices.

Single- or two-gang flush device raised covers.

C. Multiple Devices: Three or more devices at common location. Install one-piece gang boxes with one-piece device cover. Install one device per gang.

D. Construction: For interior locations, provide galvanized steel outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, to suit each respective location and installation; constructed with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded holes with screws for securing box covers or wiring devices. All surface mounted outlet boxes are to be drawn.

Welded boxes are not acceptable.

E. Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories for each installation, including mounting brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings, luminaire studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.

F. Noise Control: Provide acoustic putty pad to back side of each outlet box installed in acoustic rated walls.

2.3 JUNCTION BOXES
A. Construction: Provide ANSI 61 gray polyester powder painted sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of type shape and size, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

B. Location:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 966

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-3

1. Provide junction boxes above accessible ceilings for drops into walls for receptacle outlets from overhead.

2. Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate installation of conductors and limiting accumulated angular sum of bends between boxes, cabinets and appliances to 270 degrees.

2.4 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER
A. Construction: Diecast aluminum.

B. Location: Install over flush wall outlet boxes to permit flexible raceway extension from flush outlet to fixed or movable equipment.

2.5 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES
A. Construction: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of the type, shape and size, including depth of box, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal faceplate with spring-hinged waterproof cap suitably configured for each application, including faceplate, gasket, blank plugs and corrosion proof fasteners. Weatherproof boxes to be constructed to have smooth sides, gray finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate locations of floor boxes and wall mounted wiring device boxes with architectural and structural floor plans prior to rough-in.

B. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

C. Secure boxes rigidly to substrate upon which they are being mounted.

D. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NEC. Locate boxes and conduit bodies so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.

E. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights shown on Architectural Elevations.

F. Electrical boxes are shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

1. Adjust box locations up to 10-feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.

G. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

H. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.

Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

I. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

J. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12-inches of box.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 967

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-4
K. Box Color Coding and Marking: Reference Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.

L. Adjust boxes to be parallel with building lines. Boxes not plumb to building lines are not acceptable.

M. Install knockout closures in unused box openings.

N. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.

O. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

3.2 OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Mount outlet boxes, unless otherwise required by ADA, or noted on Drawings, following distances above finished floor:

1. Control Switches:
a. 48-inches to the top of outlet box.
b. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA requirements.

2. Receptacles:
a. 15-inches to the bottom of outlet box.
b. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA requirements.

3. Telecom Outlets:
a. Match height of adjacent receptacle.
b. 15-inches to the bottom of outlet box.
c. 4-inches above top of backsplash at countertops/workstations, not to exceed 44- inches above finished floor to the top of outlet box, per ADA standards.

4. Other Outlets: As indicated in other sections of Specifications or as detailed on Drawings.

B. Flush Outlets in Insulated Spaces: Maintain integrity of insulation and vapor barrier.

C. Coordinate electrical device locations and elevations (switches and receptacles) with architectural drawings to prevent mounting devices in mirrors, back splashes, and behind cabinets.

D. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.

E. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.

Adjacent boxes not aligned vertically to be adjusted at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.

G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inches separation.

Provide minimum 24-inches in acoustic rated walls.

H. In acoustical walls, apply acoustic putty pad on outlet box prior to installation of acoustical blanket.

I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 968

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
BOXES 26 05 34-5
K. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

L. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.

M. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

N. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

3.3 JUNCTION BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Install junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.

B. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

3.4 BOX EXTENSION ADAPTER INSTALLATION
A. Match material to box.

B. Install gaskets at exterior and wet locations.

3.5 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations.

B. Install gaskets.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 969

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1
SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Device Labels

2. Wire Markers

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals not required for this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification devices of types and sizes required.

2. Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 26, Electrical Sections. Where more than a single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product category.

3. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Device Labels:

1. Kroy

2. Brady

3. Or approved equivalent.

B. Wire Markers:

1. Brady
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 970

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-2

2. Panduit

3. Sumitomo

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 DEVICE LABELS
A. Extra strength, laminated adhesive tape with 3/16-inch black letters on clear background.

Embossed tape/punch tape style labels are not acceptable.

B. Receptacles: Indicate source panel and source circuits (e.g. xxx-xx).

C. Wall Switches/Control Device Stations:

1. Where controls are provided for remote lighting or power outlets, or where controls in same location serve different purposes or areas, such as corridor and outside, provide device label indicating function of each control device.

2. Label the function of control devices where two or more are mounted in same location and control function may be unclear.

3. Wall switches with engraved buttons do not require labeling.

D. Junction Boxes: Label to show system identification, source circuit, or raceway origin. In finished areas, utilize device label. In unfinished areas or above ceilings, use of permanent ink marker is acceptable.

E. Panel and circuit designation written in permanent marker on the back of the plate and inside all back-boxes and junction boxes.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Vinyl-cloth self-adhesive type wire markers.

B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and each load connection.

C. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on drawings and source panel.

D. Control Circuits: control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams on drawings or shop drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate designations used on Drawings with equipment nameplates and device labels.

B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines.

C. Identify empty conduit and boxes with intended use.

D. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear transparent covers accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work, and not the designations shown on Drawings.

E. Where changes are made in existing panels, distribution boards, etc., provide new labeling and typewritten schedules to accurately reflect the changes.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 971

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-3

3.2 DEVICE LABELS
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive labels. Fingers to be regularly cleaned of grease and debris to prevent fingerprints on labels. Labels installed dirty or with fingerprints to be replaced at no cost to Owner.

3.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Reference General Installation Requirements above.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide wire markers on each conductor for power, control, signalling and communications circuits.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 972

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-1
SECTION 26 08 10

BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Duties of the Team

2. Time Schedule

3. Acceptance Testing - Phase I - Documentation

4. Acceptance Testing - Phase II - Inspection and Testing

5. Acceptance Testing - Phase III - Certification
B. This Section describes the acceptance testing and documentation of the lighting system(s) and outlines the duties and responsibilities of the contracting team for acceptance testing.

C. Supply the acceptance requirements to products, equipment and systems provided under this Division, where indicated on Drawings, and where required by California Title 24 requirements.

D. Engage the services of a firm specializing in commissioning of lighting systems or submit contractor qualifications for review by architect where testing and documentation is to be performed by contractor.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Form the Commissioning Team of:

1. Electrical Contractor's Representative

2. Lighting Controls Manufacturer's Representative

3. Inspector of Record

4. Owner's Staff Representative
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 973

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUTIES OF THE TEAM
A. The duties of the Team are as outlined in the California Title 24 requirements and summarized below:

1. Plan, organize, and implement the acceptance testing process and within one month of the award of the contract; submit the names and addresses of the Testing team member(s).

2. The acceptance testing team to submit a complete description of the testing procedures and systems to be tested to the architect for review.

3. The acceptance testing team to coordinate tests of systems and equipment and assemble documentation related to tests. Submit documentation relative to tests and proposed procedures to design engineer for review prior to submitting documentation to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). Team responsible for performing data analysis, calculation of performance indices and cross-checking of results with the requirements of California Title 24 and the Contract documents. The installing contractor or agent responsible for testing and documentation to record their State of California Contractor's license number, or their State of California Professional Registration License number on each Certificate of Acceptance for submittal.

4. Responsible for submitting Certificate of Acceptance including paper and electronic copies of measurements and monitoring results and supporting documentation to the AHJ. Where AHJ questions results or requires additional testing, complete additional testing and provide required documentation at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 TIME SCHEDULE
A. Determine the time period of the commissioning of the systems by the general contractor and acceptance testing team. It is important to note that AHJ will not release a final Certificate of Occupancy until a Certificate of Acceptance is submitted that demonstrates that the specified systems and equipment have been shown to be performing in accordance with the State of California standards.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE I - DOCUMENTATION
A. Team to assemble documentation showing lighting fixture locations, lighting control device locations, control sequences and notes.

B. Per State of California requirements, team to provide record drawings to building Owner within 90 days of receiving a final occupancy permit (reference other specification Sections for requirements on record drawings).

C. Per State of California requirements, team to provide operating and maintenance manuals to the building Owner (reference other specification Sections for requirements on operation and maintenance manuals).

3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE II - INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Team to review the installation, perform acceptance testing and document results for the following systems:

1. Occupancy Sensors

2. Automatic Daylight Controls
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 974

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

BUILDING LIGHTING ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND
DOCUMENTATION 26 08 10-3
B. Review of installation to confirm lighting fixtures and lighting controls are properly located, identified, calibrated, and set points and schedules programmed per contract document requirements.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING - PHASE III - CERTIFICATION
A. Team to document operating and maintenance information, complete installation certificate, and indicate test results on the Certificate of Acceptance, and submit the Certificate to the AHJ prior to receiving final occupancy permit.

B. Team to submit NRCA-LTI and NRCA-LTO forms as required by California Title 24 requirements.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Reference State of California requirements for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Contractor is responsible for reviewing and complying with standards as required by Division 01, General Requirements and Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements as well as State and governmental standards related to this work.

B. Reference California Title 24, 2022 Nonresidential Compliance Manual and Documents for specific testing procedures and documentation requirements. Contractor is responsible for reviewing and complying with these standards. The detailed requirements can be found at:
https://www.energy.ca.gov/programs-and-topics/programs/building-energy-efficiency- standards/2022-building-energy-efficiency.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 975

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-1
SECTION 26 09 25

DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work included:

1. General Performance

2. Digital Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensor System

3. Digital Wall Switches

4. Room Controllers

5. Digital Photosensors

6. Room Network (DLM Local Network)

7. Configuration Tools
B. System Description and Operation:

1. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment:
a. Digital Room Controllers: Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two, or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for LED drivers (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers.
b. Digital Occupancy Sensors: Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
c. Digital Switches: Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. d. Digital Photosensors: Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylighting harvesting. e. Configuration Tools: Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device/room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.
f. Room Network - Digital Lighting Management (DLM) Local Network: Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.

C. Lighting Control Applications:

1. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows:
a. Space Control Requirements: Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual- ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of- sight may be obscured, provide ceiling-or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.
b. Daylit areas: All luminaires within 15-feet of windows or within 7-feet of skylights (the daylit zones) will be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. Luminaires closest to the daylight aperture will be controlled separately from luminaires farther from the daylight aperture, within the daylight zone.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 976

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-2

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 01, General Requirements and Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Layout of sensors indicating their sensing distribution on reproducible Architectural Floor Plans.

2. Shop Drawings: Provide wiring diagrams indicating low voltage and line voltage wiring requirements for occupancy sensors, and each digital lighting control system shown on the electrical drawings.

3. Closeout Submittals:
a. Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Start-up documentation that details the start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on tests performed and an area that documents any test results.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience in manufacture of architectural lighting controls.

2. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard, including in-house engineering for product design activities.

3. Lighting Control System Components: Listed by UL specifically for the required loads.

Provide evidence of compliance upon request.

4. Prior to adjusting and calibrating daylighting control system and local photocell field adjustable settings, contact local manufacturer representative and arrange for representative to visit site to educate both field installer and Owner's Authorized Representative on the operation of the controls.

5. Use manufacturer's published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensors time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of Owner.

6. Training: Provide minimum 4-hour training session to Owner's Authorized Representatives at a time approved by Owner after Owner has received approved operation and maintenance manuals. Training to include discussion of operation, adjustment, and replacement of sensors, photocells and control.

7. Prepare and complete report of test procedures and results. Submit these test procedures and results to Owner.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 977

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wattstopper DLM Series
B. Or approved equivalent.

C. Basis of Design: Daylighting and occupancy sensor layout on Drawings are designed based on Wattstopper product line. Approved manufacturers listed below are allowed on condition of meeting specified conditions including complete sensor coverage of area controlled and switching of luminaires in area controlled. Provide additional sensors and room controllers as needed to provide same level of functionality as shown on Drawings. Remove and replace electrical equipment installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.

2.2 GENERAL PERFORMANCE
A. Daylight Harvesting and Occupant Detection to Control Lighting with the Following Hierarchy:

1. Emergency (Highest Priority): Ignores all other inputs.

2. Programming: During system programming, sensor inputs are ignored.

3. Occupant Sensor: Allows lights to be on/off.

4. Daylight Sensor: Imposes a high end limit for light output.

B. Response to a single sensor can be unique on luminaire by luminaire basis.

C. Power failure recovery - All devices return to their previous light level prior to power loss.

D. All programmable devices with integral power failure memory to maintain settings for a minimum of 10 hours during power loss.

E. Wall station and sensor replacement accomplished without programming.

2.3 DIGITAL CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM
A. Ceiling mounted (to suit installation) dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the system accommodating the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors, and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.

B. Digital Occupancy Sensors will provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:

1. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:
a. Sensitivity: 0-100 percent in 10 percent increments. b. Time delay: 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments.
c. Test mode: Five second time delay.
d. Detection technology: PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re- activation.
e. Walk-through mode.
f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.

2. Two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.

3. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.

4. Device Status LEDs including:
a. PIR Detection.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 978

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-4
b. Ultrasonic detection.
c. Configuration mode.
d. Load binding.

5. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.

6. Manual override of controlled loads.

C. Units will not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.

D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.

2.4 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, and 4 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.

Wall switches will include the following:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.

2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.

3. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.

4. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED.
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch.
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active.

5. Dimming switches will include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.

B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.

C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.

D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:

1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).

2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only, or Off only.

3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.

4. Fade Up and Face Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.

5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.

6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; each button may be bound to multiple loads.

2.5 ROOM CONTROLLERS
A. Room controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features:

1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 979

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-5

2. Simple replacement - Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.

3. Device Status LEDs to indicate:
a. Data transmission.
b. Device has power.
c. Status for each load.
d. Configuration status.

4. Quick installation features including:
a. Standard junction box mounting.
b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable.

5. Plenum rated.

6. Manual override and LED indication for each load.

7. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz).

8. Zero cross circuitry for each load.

B. On/Off Room Controllers are to include:

1. One or two relay configuration.

2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply.

3. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

C. On/Off/Dimming Enhanced Room Controllers are to include:

1. Real time current monitoring.

2. Three relay configuration.

3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply.

4. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.

5. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible LED drivers.

6. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100 percent. b. Set high and low trim for each load.

7. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space.
a. One relay configuration only.
b. Automatic ON/OFF configuration.

2.6 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS
A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors are to be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.

B. Digital photosensors include the following features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode is not to measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell is to have a sensitivity of less than 5 percent for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.

2. Sensor light level range to be from 1-200 footcandles (fc).

3. The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 980

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-6

4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor is to provide a deadband or a separation between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off.

5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor is to provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a user- selectable minimum level.

6. Programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy.

7. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.

8. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.

9. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.

10. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.

11. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.

12. An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox.

C. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:

1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

2. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.

3. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a “Setpoint” to be maintained during operation.

2.7 ROOM NETWORK (DLM LOCAL NETWORK)
A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:

1. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.

2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.

3. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.

2.8 CONFIGURATION TOOLS
A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.

B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool to include:

1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.

2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 981

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-7

3. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers, and buttons on digital wall switches.

4. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.

5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s)on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.

6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and Contract Documents.

B. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional equipment required to provide control intent.

C. Install photocells as directed by manufacturer's instructions. Complete connections to control circuits, photocells, control modules, power supply pack and low voltage wiring.

D. Verify with manufacturer's representative that sensors and photocells are laid out in compliance to manufacturer's published sensing distribution. Provide additional sensors for complete coverage of space being sensed.

E. Photocell Placement and Wiring:

1. Drawings are schematic, and show photocell quantities together with the daylighting zones that they control.

2. Reference manufacturer installation instructions for the recommended location and orientation of photocell with respect to exterior glazing and both interior and exterior lighting.

3. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensors view of electric light sources; ceiling mounted and fixture-mounted daylight sensors are not to have direct view of luminaries.

4. Reposition sensor at no additional cost to Owner to avoid conflict between sensor and object obscuring its view, and between sensor and both interior and exterior lighting that causes daylighting controls to repeatedly increase and decrease in brightness (i.e., "cycling").

5. Field wire photocell for correct footcandle range.

F. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:

1. Ambient temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F.

2. Relative Humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.

G. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.

H. Prior to applying continuous dimming daylighting controls, maintain LED lighting at full output for a minimum of 100 hours. If this is not done, replace lamps and drivers of affected luminaires at no cost to Owner.

I. Use manufacturer’s published testing and adjusting procedures to adjust sensor time delay, daylight sensitivity, and passive infrared sensitivity to satisfaction of Owner.

J. Systems Integration:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 982

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 09 25-8

1. Equipment Integration Meeting Visit: Owner's Authorized Representative to coordinate meeting with Lighting Control System Manufacturer and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and integration procedures.

3.2 STARTUP AND PROGRAMMING
A. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to ensure proper system installation and operation under following parameters:

1. Qualifications for Factory-Certified Field Service Engineer:
a. Minimum experience of two years training in the electrical/electronic field. b. Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.

2. Site Visit Activities:
a. Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.
b. Verify connection of controls.
c. Verify system operation control by control, circuit by circuit. d. Obtain sign-off on system functions.
e. Demonstrate and educate Owner’s Authorized Representative on system capabilities, operation and maintenance.

B. Tech Support: Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, seven days per week.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Services:

1. Aim and Focus Visit: Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training Visit: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide one day additional on-site system training to site personnel no less than two months after Substantial Completion, separate from start-up and programming visit.

B. On-Site Walk Through: Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide a factory certified Field Service Engineer to demonstrate system functionality to the Commissioning Agent.

C. Test lighting controls to ensure that control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide functional testing of sequences of operation to ensure operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. Provide complete report of test procedures and results to engineer and insert approved copy into project closeout documents.

D. Testing Includes:

1. Daylight automatic controls.

2. Occupant sensing automatic controls.

3. Automatic time and override controls for interior lighting.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 983

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1
SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of:

1. Receptacles

2. Finish Plates

3. Surface Covers

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Receptacles

2. Wall Plates

3. In-Use Cover

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Receptacles:

1. Commercial Grade:
a. 20 Amp:
1) Cooper
2) Hubbell
3) Bryant
4) Leviton
5) Legrand P&S
6) Or approved equivalent.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 984

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2

2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Tamper-Resistant Receptacle - 20 Amp:
a. Cooper
b. Hubbell
c. Legrand P&S
d. Or approved equivalent.

B. Finish Plates:

1. Bryant

2. Cooper

3. Hubbell

4. Leviton

5. Legrand P&S

6. Or approved equivalent.

C. Surface Covers:

1. While-in-Use Weatherproof Outlet Cover:
a. Die Cast Cover:
1) Intermatic
2) Hubbell
3) Leviton
4) Cooper
5) Or approved equivalent.

D. Provide lighting switches and receptacles of common manufacturer and appearance.

2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex Receptacles Characteristics: Straight parallel blade, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding.

1. Commercial Grade: Riveted. Back and side wired. Brass ground contact on steel strap.

Nylon face and nylon base. 20 amp.

B. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacle: Feed through type, back-and-side wired, tamper-resistant, weather resistant self-testing, 20 amp, 125 VAC.

C. Finish:

1. Same exposed finish as switches.

2.3 FINISH PLATES
A. Finish Plates: Type 302 stainless steel with smooth satin finish.

2.4 SURFACE COVERS
A. Material: Galvanized steel, drawn, 1/2-inch raised industrial type with openings appropriate for devices installed on surface receptacles.

B. Cast Box and Extension Adaptors: Aluminum with gasket, blanks single-gang.

C. While-in-Use Weatherproof Cover: NEMA 3R when closed over energized plug. Vertical mount for duplex receptacle. Provide continuous use cover with cover capable of closing over energized cord cap with bottom aperture for cord exit.

1. Die cast cover with closed cell neoprene foam gasket: Capable of being locked closed to prevent tampering or unauthorized use.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 985

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. See Architectural elevations for location and mounting height of wiring devices. Review Architectural elevations prior to rough-in and contact Architect immediately if conflicts are found between Architectural and Electrical Drawings. Do not rough-in devices until conflicts are resolved.

B. Install wiring devices and finish plates plumb with building lines, equipment cabinets and adjacent devices. Devices not plumb will be fixed at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Orientation:

1. Install wiring devices with long dimension oriented vertically at centerline height shown on drawings or as specified.

2. Vertical Alignment: When more than one device is shown on Drawings in close proximity to each other, but at different elevations, align devices on a common vertical center line for best appearance. Verify with Architect.

3. Horizontal Alignment: When more than one device is shown on drawings in close proximity to each other with same elevation, align devices on a common horizontal center line for best appearance. Verify with Architect.

D. Provide labeling per Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.

E. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections, and after energizing circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test receptacles for line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground faults. Correct any defective wiring.

3.2 RECEPTACLES INSTALLATION
A. Upon installation, adhere to proper and cautious use of convenience receptacles. At time of substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty receptacles or cord caps.

B. In the following outlet locations, regardless of whether shown as GFCI on Drawings, either provide a GFCI duplex receptacle, or use a GFCI breaker where code would require a GFCI outlet to have a remote test switch:

1. Bathrooms.

2. Where receptacles are installed within 6-feet, 0-inches from edge of sinks.

3. Kitchens above counters.

4. On rooftops.

5. Outdoors.

6. Where serving vending machines.

7. Where serving electric drinking fountains.

C. GFCI Receptacles: One GFCI receptacle may not be used to provide GFCI protection to downstream duplex receptacles on the same branch circuit.

3.3 FINISH PLATES INSTALLATION
A. Do not install items until finish painting is complete. Replace scratched and paint splattered finish plates and wiring devices.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 986

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4

3.4 SURFACE COVERS INSTALLATION
A. Do not install items until finish painting is complete. Replace scratched and paint splattered finish plates and wiring devices.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 987

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-1
SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches

2. Safety Switches

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toggle Type Disconnect Switches:

1. Cooper

2. Hubbell

3. Leviton

4. Legrand (Pass & Seymour)

5. Slater

6. Or approved equivalent.

B. Safety Switches:

1. Eaton Electrical

2. ABB/General Electric

3. Siemens

4. Schneider Electric/Square D
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 988

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-2

5. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Rating: 120 volt, 1 or 2 pole, 20 amp, 1 hp maximum.

B. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 1: Dry locations/Indoors.

2. NEMA 3R: Damp or wet locations/Outdoors.

C. Handle lockable in "OFF" position.

2.3 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Heavy duty fusible type and non-fusible type (as indicated on drawings), dual rated, quick- make, quick-break with fuse rejection feature for use with Class R fuses only, unless other fuse type is specifically noted.

B. Clearly marked for maximum voltage, current, and horsepower.

C. Operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in 'on' position.

D. Switches rated for maximum available fault current.

E. Handle lockable in "OFF" position.

F. Enclosure:

1. NEMA 1: Dry locations/Indoors.

2. NEMA 3R: Damp or wet locations/Outdoors.

G. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse clips: Provide fuse rejection feature for Class R or J fuses up to 600 amp. Remove if circuit breaker type is used. Provide switches of 30 to 200 amp with plug-on line side connections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain and review the submitted product data for equipment furnished by the Owner, and furnished under other Divisions of this contract, particularly under Divisions 22 and 23.

B. Confirm the equipment nameplate maximum overcurrent protection (MOCP) and make accommodations and adjustments to switches, fuses and circuit breakers as necessary to coordinate with the nameplate rating.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Provide engraved nameplates per Section 26 05 53, Identification for Electrical Systems.

3.2 TOGGLE TYPE DISCONNECT SWITCHES INSTALLATION
A. Install products, systems and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 989

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-3
B. See General Installation Requirements above.

3.3 SAFETY SWITCHES INSTALLATION
A. Install products, systems and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Coordinate fuse ampere rating with installed equipment. Do not provide fuses of lower ampere rating than the motor starter thermal units.

C. See General Installation Requirements above.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 990

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-1
SECTION 26 51 00

LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Luminaires

2. LED Drivers

3. Lamps
B. Provide wiring for complete and operating lighting system.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 26, Electrical and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. NECA 500 - Commercial Lighting.

2. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) equipment for use in lighting products.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Submit product data for:
a. LED Luminaires: Electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting, material, clearances, terminations, wiring, connection diagram, LM-79 photometric data, LM-80 lumen depreciation data.
b. LED Drivers
c. Lamps

2. Submittal Cutsheets: Highlight, circle or otherwise graphically indicate which option(s) are being selected for the products submitted. Cutsheets that are not edited to indicate which products and options are submitted for this project or that list only catalog numbers to identify submitted options are not acceptable.

3. Specified manufacturers are approved to submit bid. However, inclusion does not relieve manufacturer from supplying product as described.

4. Provide the following operating and maintenance instructions as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements:
a. Luminaires
b. LED Drivers
c. Lamps
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 991

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Provide luminaires acceptable to code authority for application and location installed.

2. Comply with applicable ANSI standards.

3. Comply with applicable NEMA standards.

4. Provide luminaires and lampholders that comply with UL standards and have been listed and labeled for location and use indicated by a testing agency acceptable by the AHJ (e.g., UL, ETL, and the like).

5. Comply with CEC as applicable to installation and construction of luminaires.

6. Comply with fallout and retention requirements of CBC for diffusers, baffles, and louvers.

7. Provide LED luminaires from the same manufacturer and manufacturing LED source batch for similar applications (e.g., all LED downlights from a single manufacturer and batch, all linear LED products from single manufacturer and batch).

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty as required by Section 26 00 00, Electrical Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. LED Luminaire Manufacturer's Warranty: Not less than 5 years for luminaire based on date of substantial completion. Includes normal cost of labor to replace luminaire.

Replacement luminaire will match physical dimensions, physical appearance, chromaticity, lumen output and photometric characteristics of original installed equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Luminaires:

1. Reference description and manufacturers in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.

2. Or approved equivalent.

B. LED Drivers:

1. Indoor Drivers:
a. eldoLED Series
b. Advance/Philips
c. Osram Sylvania
d. Or approved equivalent.

2. Outdoor Drivers:
a. Advance/Philips
b. Osram Sylvania
c. LG
d. Or approved equivalent.

C. Lamps:

1. LED (Light Emitting Diode) Lamps:
a. Nichia
b. Cree
c. Osram Sylvania
d. GE Lumination
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 992

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-3
e. Or approved equivalent.

2. Unless specific manufacturer not shown on this list is indicated in the Luminaire Schedule.

3. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Luminaires: Reference description and manufacturers in Luminaire Schedule on Drawings.

B. Where recessed luminaires are installed in cavities intended to be insulated, provide IC rated luminaires or other code approved installation.

C. UL label luminaires installed under canopies, roof or open porches, and similar damp or wet locations, as suitable for damp or wet location.

D. Recessed Luminaires: Frame compatible with ceiling material installed at particular luminaire location. Provide proper factory trim and frame for luminaire to fit location and ceiling material.

Verify with Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan prior to submittals.

E. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard finish (unless otherwise indicated) over corrosion resistant primer.

2. Interior Light Reflecting Finishes: White or specular finish with not less than 85 percent reflectance.

3. Exterior Finishes: As detailed in Luminaire Schedule or on Drawings. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to Architect for resolution prior to release for fabrication.

F. Light Transmitting Components:

1. Plastic diffusers, molded or extruded of 100 percent virgin acrylic.

2. Prismatic acrylic, extruded, flat diffusers, 0.125-inch overall thickness, unless otherwise noted.

G. LED Luminaires:

1. UL listing of luminaire includes drivers, transformers, enclosures, rated wire, communications devices and accessories needed for a complete and functional system.

2. LM-79: Testing and measurement of absolute photometry, chromaticity (CCT) and luminaire power. Report provided by DOE certified independent testing laboratory. CCT as specified in Luminaire Schedule.

3. Standards: ANSI C78.377, LM-79 and LM-82 compliant for performance characteristics, photometry, colorimetry, efficacy and thermal characteristics.

4. LM-80 + TM-21: Testing and measurement, and statistical prediction of LED lamp life.

Report provided by DOE certified independent testing laboratory.

5. LEDs in one module/luminaire: Supplied from same batch/bin and fall within 3-step MacAdam Ellipse, or as described in Luminaire Schedule, whichever is the more stringent requirement.

6. Provide luminaires with integral LED thermal management system (heat sinking).

7. Luminaires to be equipped with an LED driver that accepts 120V through 277V, 50Hz to 60Hz (universal). Component-to-component wiring within the luminaire will carry no more than 80 percent of rated current and be listed by UL for use at 600VAC at 302 degrees F/150 degrees C or higher. Plug disconnects to be listed by UL for use at 600VAC, 15A or higher.

8. Provide luminaires with individual LED arrays/modules and drivers that are accessible and replaceable from exposed side of the luminaire.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 993

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-4

2.3 LED DRIVERS
A. General:

1. Performance: Meet dimming range called out in Luminaire Schedule, free from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experienced in a commercial environment. Demonstration of this compliance to dimming performance will be necessary for substitutions or prior approval.

2. Ten-year expected life while operating at maximum case temperature and 90 percent non- condensing relative humidity.

3. Minimum efficiency of 85 percent, power factor greater than or equal to 0.90, compliance with reduction of hazardous substances (RoHS). Rated for operating temperature range of area in which driver is installed.

4. Limit inrush current to minimize breaker tripping.
a. Base specification: NEMA 410 standard for inrush current for electronic drivers. b. Preferred Specification: Meet or exceed 30 milliamp-squared-seconds at 277VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75 amps at 240 microseconds at 277VAC for 100 watts of load.

5. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A.

6. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line voltage input.

7. Total Harmonic Distortion less than 10 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD at no point in the dimming curve allows imbalance current to exceed full output THD.

8. Support automatic adaptation, allowing for future luminaire upgrades and enhancements and deliver improved performance:
a. Adjustment of forward LED voltage, supporting 3V through 55V. b. Adjustment of LED current from 150mA to 1.4A at the 100 percent control input point in increments of 1mA.
c. Adjustment for operating hours to maintain constant lumens (within 5 percent) over the 50,000 hour design life of the system, and deliver up to 20 percent energy savings early in the life cycle.

9. Operate for a (+/- 10 percent) supply voltage of 120V through 277VAC at 60Hz.

10. UL Recognized under the component program and modular for simple field replacement.

Drivers that are not UL Recognized or not suited for field replacement will not be considered.

11. Ability to provide no light output when the analog control signal drops below 0.3 V, or the DALI/DMX digital signal calls for light to be extinguished and consume 0.5 watts or less in this standby. Control dead band between 0.3V and 0.65V included to allow for voltage variation of incoming signal without causing noticeable variation in luminaire to luminaire output.

B. Light Quality:

1. Over the entire range of available drive currents, driver to provide step-free, continuous dimming to black from 100 percent to 0.1 percent and 0 percent relative light output, or 100 percent to 1 percent light output and step to 0 percent where indicated. Driver to respond similarly when raising from 0 percent to 100 percent. a. Driver must be capable of 20 bit dimming resolution for white light LED drivers or 15 bit resolution for RGBW LED drivers.

2. Driver must be capable of configuring a linear or logarithmic dimming curve, allowing fine grained resolution at low light levels.

3. Drivers to track evenly across multiple luminaires at all light levels, and must have an input signal to output light level that allows smooth adjustment over the entire dimming range.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 994

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-5

4. Driver and luminaire electronics to deliver illumination that is free from objectionable flicker as measured by flicker index (ANSI/IES RP-16-10). At all points within the dimming range from 100 percent to 0.1 percent luminaire will have:
a. LED dimming driver to provide continuous step-free, flicker free dimming similar to incandescent source.
b. Base specification: Based on IEEE PAR1789, minimum output frequency should be greater than 1250 Hz.
c. Preferred specification: Flicker index to be equal to incandescent, less than 1 percent at all frequencies below 1000 Hz.

C. Control Input:

1. Provide control protocol to match lighting control system specified for use with luminaire.

2. 4-Wire (0-10V DC Voltage Controlled) Dimming Drivers:
a. Meet IEC 60929 Annex E for General White Lighting LED drivers. b. Connect to devices compatible with 0 to 10V Analog Control Protocol, Class 2, capable of sinking 0.6 ma per driver at a low end of 0.3V. Limit the number of drivers on each 0-10V control output based on voltage drop and control capacity.

2.4 LAMPS
A. Provide lamps for luminaires.

B. Provide lamp catalogued for specified luminaire type.

C. LED (Light Emitting Diode):

1. LED manufacturer will include, but not be limited to, light source, luminaire, power supply and control interface with added components as needed for complete and functioning system.
a. Comply with ANSI chromaticity standard for classifications of color temperature.

See Luminaire Schedule for specified LED lamp color and color temperature. UL or ETL listed and labeled.
b. Luminaire testing per IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 procedures. c. Lamp life for white LEDs: 50,000 plus hours with lamp failure occurring when LED produces 70 percent of initial rated lumens.
d. Lamp life for color LEDs: 30,000 plus hours with lamp failure occurring when LED produces 50 percent of its initial rated lumens.
e. LED Drivers: Reverse polarity protection, open circuit protection, require no minimum load. Minimum 80 percent efficiency. Class A noise rating. f. Dimming: LED system capable of full and continuous dimming. g. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT): See Luminaire Schedule for selection of color temperature for each luminaire. Ranges given below reflect maximum allowable tolerances for color temperature range for each nominal CCT. 1) Nominal CCT:
(a) 3500 K (3465 ± 245)
h. Color Rendering Index (CRI) to be greater than or equal to 80.

2. Special types as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install per manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements.

B. Install luminaires securely, in neat and workmanlike manner.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 995

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-6
C. Install luminaires of types indicated where shown and at indicated heights in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that luminaires comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

D. Wiring:

1. Recessed luminaires to be installed using flexible metallic conduit with luminaire conductors spliced to branch circuit conductors in nearby accessible junction box over ceiling. Junction box fastened to building structural member within 6-feet of luminaire.

2. Luminaires for lift out and removal from ceiling pattern without disconnecting conductors or defacing ceiling materials.

3. Install junction box, flexible conduit and high temperature insulated conductors for through wiring of recessed luminaires.

E. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at substantial completion.

F. Replace LED drivers deemed as excessively noisy by Architect, Engineer, or Owner.

G. Support luminaires larger than 2- by 4-foot size independent of ceiling framing.

H. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on architectural reflected ceiling plan.

I. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.

J. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.

K. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.

L. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.

M. Install wall mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

N. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

O. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.

P. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

Q. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.

R. Where manufactured wiring assemblies are used, ensure that wiring assembly manufacturer sends components to appropriate luminaire manufacturer for respective installation of proper components.

S. Coordination:

1. Coordination of Conditions: Coordinate ceiling construction, recessing depth and other construction details prior to ordering luminaires for shipment. Refer cases of uncertain applicability to Architect for resolution prior to release of luminaires for shipment. Where luminaires supplied do not match ceiling construction, replace luminaires at no cost to Owner.

2. Electrical drawings are schematic, identifying quantity and type of luminaires used and their approximate location, but are not to be used for dimensional purposes. Reference architectural drawings for exact locations, including mounting heights.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 996

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
LIGHTING 26 51 00-7

3. Provide lighting indicated on Drawings with luminaire of the type designated and appropriate for location.

4. Provide LED luminaires with driver compatible to lighting control system as shown in drawings and as specified.

T. Field Quality Control:

1. Perform field inspection in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements.

2. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.

U. Cleaning:

1. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.

2. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.

3. Clean paint splatters, dirt, dust, fingerprints, and debris from luminaires.

4. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

5. Clean finishes and touch up damaged finishes per by manufacturer's instructions.

V. Demonstrate luminaire operation for minimum of two hours.

3.2 LUMINAIRES INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements.

B. Align, mount and level luminaires uniformly. Use ball hangers for suspended stem mounted luminaires.

C. Avoid interference with and provide clearance from equipment. Where indicated locations for luminaires conflict with locations for equipment, change locations for luminaire by minimum distance necessary as directed by Architect.

D. Interior Luminaire Supports:

1. Support Luminaires: Anchor supports to structural slab or to structural members within a partition, or above a suspended ceiling.

2. Maintain luminaire positions after cleaning and relamping.

3. Support luminaires without causing ceiling or partition to deflect.

4. Provide mounting supports for recessed and pendant mounted luminaires as required by CBC.

3.3 LED DRIVERS INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps per manufacturer's installation instructions and requirements.

B. Where driver is remote mounted, size wiring based on type of driver, driver distance from luminaire, and voltage/power level, and manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Protect 0-10V input from line voltage mis-connection, and so it will be immune and the output unresponsive to induced AC voltage on the control leads.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 997

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-1
SECTION 27 00 00

COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 27 00 00 applies to Division 27, Communications work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make communications systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.

1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Communications system for this project.

B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.

1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.

B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.

1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 27 Specifications.

Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 27 Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.

B. Design Criteria: Reference Basis of Design narrative document.

C. Pathways for Communication Systems Criteria:

1. Refer to Section 27 05 28, Pathways for Communications Systems.

D. Communications Horizontal Cabling Criteria:

1. Refer to Section 27 15 00, Communications Horizontal Cabling.

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements applies to Division 27, Communications work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of communications systems for proposed project.

B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 998

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-2
C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.

6. Entrance Facility (EF): Area or location that contains entrance point (demarcation) cable and associated equipment for telecommunication services entering the building.

7. Equipment Room (ER): Area or location that contains backbone cabling associated with interbuilding cable or cable that connects buildings together in a campus environment.

ERs may contain Main Cross-Connects, Intermediate Cross-Connects, Horizontal Cross- Connects, and Telecommunication Rooms.

8. Main Cross-Connect (MC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment for connecting backbone cable to/from Intermediate Cross-Connects and Horizontal Cross-Connects. Active telecommunications equipment will often be contained in this area to serve as the telecommunications hub or headend. Backbone cable from Local Exchange Carrier's point of demarcation will connect to building backbone cable or active telecommunications equipment at this location.

9. Main Point of Entry (MPOE): Area or location where service providers terminate and handoff to customer owned premise cabling system.

10. Main Telecommunications Room (MTR): Location that services as the main distribution point for Client/Owner telecommunications system. The MTR connects to each TR and the MPOE. MTR should not be accessible by the service providers. In most cases the MTR is a private space.

11. Intermediate Cross-Connect (IC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment for connecting backbone cable from the MC to backbone cable distributing to one or many Horizontal Cross-Connects. This location may contain active telecommunications equipment.

12. Horizontal Cross-Connect (HC): Area or location that contains telecommunications equipment, cable terminations and cross-connect wiring. HC is the recognized connection point between backbone and horizontal pathway facilities.

13. Telecommunications Room (TR): Area or location containing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations and cross-connect wiring. Three applications serviced by TRs are horizontal cable connections, backbone system interconnection and entrance facilities. The TR provides facilities (space, power, grounding, etc.) for housing telecommunications equipment. TR may contain a MC, IC or HC and a demarcation point or an interbuilding entrance facility.

14. Interbuilding Cable: Backbone cable associated with connecting buildings together in a multibuilding or campus environment.

15. Intrabuilding Cable: Backbone cable associated with connecting Entrance Facility, Equipment Rooms, Main Cross-Connects, Intermediate Cross-Connects, Horizontal Cross-Connects, and Telecommunication Rooms together on single floor or multi-floor building.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 999

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-3

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section applies to Division 27, Communications Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. 27 05 28 - Pathways for Communications Systems
c. 27 05 28.28 - Firestopping for Communications Systems d. 27 15 00 - Communications Horizontal Cabling
e. Drawings
f. Addenda
g. Owner/Architect Agreement
h. Owner/Contractor Agreement
i. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Related Products/Systems within Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security.

1. Section 28 10 00 – Access Control and Intrusion Detection

1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 27, Communications Sections and those listed in this Section.

B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference codes, standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
a. ANSI/TIA-526-7-A Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant
b. ANSI/TIA-526-14-C Optical Power Loss of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant c. ANSI/TIA-568.0-D - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises d. ANSI/TIA-568.1-D - Commercial Building Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
e. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard
f. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D-2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard, Addendum 2
g. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
h. ANSI/TIA-568.3-D-1 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1000

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-4
i. ANSI/TIA-568.4-D - Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components j. ANSI/TIA-569-E - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
k. ANSI/TIA-570-D - Residential Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard l. ANSI/TIA-598-D - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
m. ANSI/TIA-598-D-1 - Optical Fiber Color Coding in Cable Addendum 1, additional Colors for Elements 3-16
n. ANSI/TIA-598-D-2 - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding Addendum 2, Jacket Color for OM5 Indoor Fiber Cables
o. ANSI/TIA-606-C - Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure
p. ANSI/TIA-J-STD-607-D - Generic Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
q. TIA-758-B Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard
r. ANSI/TIA-942-B - Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers

4. APWA - American Public Works Association

5. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers

6. ASHRAE - Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

7. ASIS INTL - American Society for Industrial Security International

8. ASTM - ASTM International

9. AVIXA - Producer of InfoComm and international trade organization representing the audiovisual industry

10. BICSI - Building Industry Consulting Service International a. BICSI TDMM - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 14th Edition, 2020
b. BICSI ITSIMM - Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual, 8th Edition, 2022
c. BICSI OSPDRM - Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, 6th Edition, 2018

11. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

12. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

13. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

14. FCC - Federal Communications Division

15. IBC - International Building Code

16. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission

17. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

18. IFC - International Fire Code

19. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

20. NEC - National Electric Code

21. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

22. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

23. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association

24. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. In addition:

1. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1001

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-5
confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section. Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.

3. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 27, Communications Sections.

4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and Drawings. a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.

Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.
b. Provide a red rectangle around part number and description with corresponding red arrow pointing to the item/material being submitted. 1) Submit one submittal per specification section in Division 27. As stated above, identify all items being submitted for approval prior to installation. c. Include technical data, installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.

Reference individual Division 27, Communications specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements. d. See Division 27, Communications individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

5. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.

6. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.

7. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support to meet the AHJ terms of satisfaction. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components.

8. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 27, Communications Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical submittals.

9. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

10. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:
a. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional. b. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1002

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-6
equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

11. Shop Drawings:
a. Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 27, Communications specification Sections for additional requirements for Shop Drawings outside of these requirements.
b. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.
c. Provide Shop Drawings indicating all elevations for proposed layouts of equipment on all walls and for each rack elevation. This is required to obtain approval prior to installations. No work will be accepted prior to the approval process. Contractor is to submit for all wall elevations and rack elevations per these specifications and as illustrated on the drawings. If a conflict exists, contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Owner and work to a satisfactory solution that meets the terms of satisfaction.
1) Contents shall include all walls, racks where Contractor proposes to install submittal material and equipment.

12. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

13. Resubmission Requirements:
a. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide submittals as specified. The Engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Changes made for the resubmittal will be indicated in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and will reference response to comment. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud changes in the submittals.
b. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken, or "make corrections as noted."
c. When submitting Drawings for Engineer's re-review, clearly indicate changes on Drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.

14. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:
a. Submit, at one time, electronic files (native/searchable PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
1) Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
2) Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities, relevant to each piece of equipment: batteries, lamp lenses, speakers and filters.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1003

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-7
3) Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Sections. 4) Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. 5) Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and subassemblies.
6) Include copy of burn-in and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. 7) Include copy of software/appliance programming.
8) Include commissioning reports.
9) Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format. Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.
b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Submit copy of material used for Owner instruction. Field instruction per Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."
c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

15. Record Drawings:
a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions. Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements, location of conduit, and location of concealed communication items. Include items changed by field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.
b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and connection schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project. c. At completion of project, input changes to original project on Revit Model and make one set of black-line Drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to Contract Drawings. Submit Revit Model and Drawings upon substantial completion.
d. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for incoming utilities and site raceways below grade extending to 5-feet outside building line. e. See Division 27, Communications individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement, or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (i.e., conduit) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1004

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-8
Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

G. Contractor Qualifications:

1. Minimum of five years' experience in the design, installation, testing and maintenance of communications systems.

2. Must employ at least one full time BICSI certified Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) who is involved in reviewing work performed by contractor on this project.

3. Installation technicians must be BICSI certified for copper and fiber optic installations that are current and in good standing with BICSI. Provide roster of communications technicians and verifiable certifications for this project.

4. Maintain a local service facility which stocks spare devices and/or components for servicing systems.

5. Be able to provide project references for three projects, including scope of Work, project type, Owner/user contact name and telephone number.

6. The contractor selected for this project must be certified by the manufacturer of the approved products and utilize these components for completion of work.

7. Provide Manufacturer certifications for each respective technician that will be working on the project. All technicians must be manufacturer certified to install, terminate, and test horizontal and backbone cabling.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout Drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.

Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1005

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-9
B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Drawings in Revit model. Revit model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size, and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Incorporate addenda items and change orders.

4. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.

D. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to cable, outlets, patch panels, equipment connection cords and wall plates.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., amplifiers, taps, zone controllers, volume controls, and storage devices) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1006

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-10
with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Earthwork:

1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.

Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

E. Firestopping:

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:
a. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 27 Communications Sections.

B. General:

1. Earthquake resistant designs for Communications (Division 27) equipment and distribution, i.e. cabinets and racks, ceiling assemblies, raceways, ladder racking, etc. to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

2. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

3. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic bracing and seismic movement assemblies for cabinets, racks, major equipment and overhead raceways. Engineer to design and provide stamped Shop Drawings cabinets, racks, October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1007

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-11
major equipment and overhead raceway. Submit Shop Drawings along with equipment submittals.

4. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details.

5. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of communications equipment during earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Underground conduit installation prior to backfilling.

2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, or addition of a structure to existing structure, while existing structure is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or equipment is installed.

2. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly prepared.

Install new wiring to point of connection.

3. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its completion to keep interference to a minimum. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift work.

4. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftspeople of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1008

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-12

3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired, refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.6 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

3.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

2. Protect all equipment and conduit to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required.

Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

3.9 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1009

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-13
B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

3.10 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Install equipment and devices in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly secured to mounting surfaces. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test operation and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment.

3.11 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of communications work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces in telecommunications rooms, i.e., hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. In a telecommunications room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect. Fire rated plywood backboards to receive two coats of fire retardant paint on all six sides; color to be white.

3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.

6. Covers: Covers such as handholes, maintenance holes, vaults, pullboxes and the like will be furnished with finishes which resist corrosion and rust. Covers are to be identified with ‘Communications.’ It is the Contractor's responsibility to proactively seek and obtain approval with Owner prior to purchasing and prior to installation for terms of satisfaction.

3.12 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to communications systems required to meet code and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1010

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-14
c. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work. Compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

2. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

3. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused raceways behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap raceways and patch surfaces to match surrounding finish.

4. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment, electrical boxes, fittings and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).

5. Examination:
a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work.
2) Verify location and number of communications outlets, racks, panels, etc. in field.
d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

6. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

7. Execution:
a. Remove existing connectors, backboxes, wall plates and other communications equipment and devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings.
b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain communications continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate communications boxes, conduit, wiring, equipment, and the like, as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work. In no event shall existing systems that are to remain operational, be diminished in any capacity by the demolition efforts.
c. Remove and restore cable which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition.
d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing communications equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and cable to bypass abandoned outlets. e. If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and cable to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing equipment. If these are conduits which require a new cable home run, e.g. telecom cable, request clarification from Architect or Engineer prior to proceeding with demolition. f. Extend cable slack and devices in existing walls to be furred out. g. Remove abandoned cable to point of origin and telecommunications room or any other room or space.
h. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1011

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-15
i. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
j. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. k. Maintain access to existing communications installations which remain active.

Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. l. Existing communications outlets and devices are indicated on technology demolition plans. Verify exact location and number of existing communications outlets and devices in field. Only partial existing communications shown. Locations of items shown on Drawings as existing are partially based on Record and other Drawings which may contain errors. Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish intent of Contract Documents.
m. Remove abandoned cable to leave site clean.

B. Existing Communication Systems: Maintain existing systems in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.

1. Notify Owner at least five working days before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.13 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 27, Communications Sections and the following:

1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Testing Reports, as outlined in their respective Division sections b. Cleaning
c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
d. Training of Operating Personnel
e. Record Drawings, including cabling identifications, symbols, and locations f. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates, including extended manufacturer's warranties g. Start-up/test Documents and Commissioning Reports

3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and individual Division 27, Communications Sections.

B. Tests:

1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. All cabling test results are to be included.

2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.

3.15 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement that Communications items were installed in accordance with manufacturer's October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1012

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS BASIC REQUIREMENTS 27 00 00-16
recommendations, and UL listings and approvals. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1013

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-1
SECTION 27 05 28.28

FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Firestop Sealants

2. Firestop Putty

3. Fire Rated Cable Pathways

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. In addition, reference the following:

1. Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, provide:

1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for specified products demonstrating compliance with referenced standards and listing numbers of systems in which each product is to be used.

2. Schedule of UL System Drawings: Submit schedule of expected opening locations and sizes, penetrating items and required listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance ratings. If engineering recommendations are necessary, list these in the schedule too.

3. UL System Drawings: Furnish copies of UL Systems identified in schedule above. Include any engineering recommendations.

4. Certificates: Product Certificate of Compliance from the firestop system manufacturer certifying material compliance with applicable code and specified performance characteristics.

5. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Products/Systems: Provide firestopping systems that comply with the following requirements:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1014

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-2
a. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified, testing and inspection agency. A qualified testing and inspection agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop system acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Firestopping products bear the classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.

2. Installer Qualifications: Experience in performing work of this Section who is qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having been provided the necessary training to install firestop products in accordance with specified requirements.

3. General: Use only firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire resistance rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved for each separate instance.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire rated cable pathway devices to be used for ALL low-voltage, video, data and voice cabling, optical fiber raceways and certain high voltage cabling where frequent cable moves, adds and changes may occur. Pathways required for high voltage cabling will be detailed on the Drawings. Such devices will:

1. Meet the hourly fire rating of fire rated wall and or floor penetrated.

2. Be tested for the surrounding construction and cable types involved.

3. Have UL Systems permitting cable loads from “Zero to 100 percent Visual Fill.” This requirement eliminates need for fill-ratio calculations to be made by cable technicians to ensure cable load is within maximum allowed by UL System.

4. Not have inner fabric liner that tightens around and compresses cables tightly together encouraging alien cross-talk interference.

5. Be “Zero-Maintenance” defined as: No action required by cabling technician to open and/or close pathway for cable moves, adds, or changes, such as:
a. Opening or closing of doors.
b. Spinning rings to open or close fabric liner.
c. Removal and/or replacement of any material such as firestop caulk, putty, pillows, bag foam muffins, foam blocks, or foam closures of any sort. d. Furnish letter from manufacturer certifying compliance with this definition of Zero- Maintenance.
1) Pathways will be engineered such that two or more devices may be ganged together for larger cable capacities.
2) Pathways will be engineered to be re-enterable so they can be retrofitted and removed from around existing cables without cutting and resplicing them.
3) Affix adhesive wall label immediately adjacent to devices to communicate to future cable technicians, authorities having jurisdiction and others the manufacturer of the device and the corresponding UL System number installed.
e. Where nonmechanical pathways must be utilized, such as sealing (caulking) around single or grouped conduits, provide products that upon curing do not re- emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown, or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water, or other forms of moisture characteristic during or after construction. Provide letter from manufacturer certifying compliance with this Section.
f. Cable pathway to replace conduit sleeves in walls and floors and; October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1015

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-3
1) When installed individually in floors, devices to pass through core-drilled opening utilizing tested floor plates.
2) When multiple units are ganged in floors, devices to be anchored by means of a tested grid.
3) When installed individually in walls, devices to pass through core-drilled opening utilizing tested wall plates.
4) When multiple units are ganged in walls, devices to be anchored by means of a tested grid.
g. Cable tray will terminate at each fire barrier and resume on the other side such that cables pass independently through devices. Cable tray will be properly supported on each side of fire barrier.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limitations recommended by manufacturer.

B. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

C. Maintain minimum temperature before, during and for a minimum 3 days after installation of materials.

D. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents.

E. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

F. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

G. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Firestop Sealants:

1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).

2. Or approved equivalent.

B. Firestop Putty:

1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).

2. Or approved equivalent.

C. Fire Rated Cable Pathways:

1. Basis of Design: Specified Technologies Inc. (STI).

2. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 FIRESTOP SEALANTS
A. STI SpecSeal® Brand single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series SSS Sealant.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1016

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28.28-4

2. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series LCI Sealant.

B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.

C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.

2.3 FIRESTOP PUTTY
A. STI SpecSeal® Brand intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) SpecSeal® Series SSP Putty.

B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.

C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.

2.4 FIRE RATED CABLE PATHWAYS
A. STI EZ-PATH™ Brand device modules comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill, the following products are acceptable:

1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) EZ-PATH™ Fire Rated Pathway.

B. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration and construction condition indicated only from a single manufacturer.

C. Basis of Design: Firestop components shown on Drawings and listed in this specification Section are designed based on Specified Technologies, Inc. product line. Manufacturer listed is allowed on condition of meeting the specified conditions including the available space for the equipment (including code-required working clearances). Remove and replace components installed not meeting these conditions at no cost to Owner.

1. Manufacturer: STI
a. Part Numbers: TRK444, INCLUDING ALL FRAMES, BLANKS, DEVICES,

GASKETS, FIRE SEALING MATERIALS, AND FIRE WRAP TO ACHIEVE THE DESIRED T-RATING.

D. 4-inch EZ-PATHWAYS:

1. Manufacturer: STI
a. Part Numbers:
1) EZD44S2, 4-inch Device
2) EZDP44S2, 4-inch Device with wall plates and labels
3) EZP544W, Multi-gang wall plate brackets, 1-5 DEVICES 4) EZG444, Single slot frame for Four pathways
5) EZDG444S2, Single bank floor grid- Four devices with floor frame

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1017

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-1
SECTION 27 05 28

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Conduit Pathways
a. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings
b. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings
c. PVC Conduit

2. Conduit Accessories

3. Penetration Sealing Systems

4. Telecommunications Outlet Boxes

5. Pull Boxes

6. J-Hooks

7. Ceiling Hatches
B. This Section specifies the requirements to provide communications conduit pathways, boxes, cable trays, innerduct and fittings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:

2. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements

3. 27 00 00 - Communications Basic Requirements

4. Drawings

5. Addenda

6. Owner/Architect Agreement

7. Owner/Contractor Agreement

8. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Provide plan drawings showing completions and as-built corrections which indicate type, size, placement, routing and/or length for pathway components; e.g., conduit, boxes, enclosures, etc.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1018

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Cabinet: A freestanding floor-mounted modular enclosure designed to house and protect rack- mounted electronic equipment.

B. Conduit: Round raceway.

C. Conduit Body: Separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access through removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system or at a terminal point of the system.

D. Pull Box Enclosure: Box with a cover installed in one or more runs of raceway to facilitate pulling conductors through the raceway system. There are no openings in the cover.

E. Pathway: Physical infrastructure (e.g., conduit, cable tray, raceway) used to facilitate the placement of information and communications technology (ICT), audiovisual (AV) or electronic safety and security (ESS) cabling media.

F. Raceway: Enclosed channel designed expressly for holding wires or cables. Metal, plastic or insulating material and the term includes conduit, tubing, wireways, underfloor pathways and surface raceways; does not include basket tray, nor cable runway.

G. Surface Raceway: Surface-mounted metal channel or plastic duct with snap-in removable covers for housing and protecting electrical wires and cables. Raceway and fittings are designed so sections can be electrically and mechanically coupled together without subjecting cables to abrasion.

H. Basket Tray (Wire Basket) Systems: Includes but are not limited to straight sections of type wire basket runway cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, drop-outs, supports and accessories.

I. Vaults or Maintenance Holes: Precast vaults or Maintenance Holes (MH) are located in various areas including landscape, hardscape, pedestrian sidewalks, incidental traffic, and full traffic instances.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Conduit Pathways

1. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings:
a. Sealing Fittings:
1) Crouse-Hinds
2) Or approved equivalent.

2. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1019

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-3
b. Wheatland Tube
c. Appleton
d. Or approved equivalent.

3. PVC Conduit
a. Contractor chosen manufacturer shall be submitted for approval.

B. Conduit Accessories:

1. Pull String: Polyolefin pull line, tensile strength of 200-lbs. a. Gardner Bender
b. Greenlee
c. Ideal
d. Klein Tools
e. Or approved equivalent.

2. Pull Tape: Woven 3/4-Inch polyester pull tape, 2,500-lb tensile strength, pre-lubrication to reduce coefficient of friction, imprinted with footage markings. a. Gardner Bender
b. George-Ingraham
c. Greenlee
d. Ideal
e. Klein Tools
f. Mule Tape
g. Or approved equivalent.

C. Penetration Sealing Systems:

1. STI

2. Or approved equivalent
D. Telecommunications Outlet Boxes:

1. RandL

2. Raco

3. Or approved equivalent.

E. Pull Boxes:

1. Hoffman

2. Or approved equivalent.

F. J-Hooks, Plenum Rated clip on cradles:

1. Two-inch
a. B-Line
b. Erico
c. Panduit
d. CEAS
1) Stiffy
e. Or approved equivalent.

2. Four-inch
a. B-Line
b. Erico
c. Panduit
d. CEAS
1) Stiffy
e. Or approved equivalent
G. Ceiling Hatches

1. Provided by ceiling hatch contractor.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1020

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-4

2. A minimum size of 24-inch by 24-inch hinged ceiling hatch shall be provided and installed where necessary to efficiently access the cabling in accessible areas. a. Coordinate placement of ceiling hatches, as required to complete the scope of work associated with this project, with the Owner, Architect, General Contractor, and Technology Design Consultant prior to installation.

3. A rated ceiling hatch shall be required if located in a rated envelope, corridor or shaft. a. Hatch rating shall match or exceed environment.
b. Shall be paint grade.
c. Coordinate final finishes with Architect and Owner.

2.2 CONDUIT PATHWAYS
A. Pathways: Labeled and/or listed as acceptable to the AHJ as suitable for the use intended.

B. Table 1: Product Identification:

Product Designation Product Type
RMC Rigid Metal Conduit
PVC-coated RMC PVC Externally Coated RMC
EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing
PVC Polyvinylchloride Conduit
LFMC Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
LFNC Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetal Conduit
C. The product identification codes used for the Communications Raceways and Boxes in Part 2, Products, are summarized in Table 1.

D. Bitumastic material or plastic tape.

2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A. Conduit:

1. Type RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit.

2. Type PVC-coated RMC: PVC externally coated conduit; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating and internal galvanized surface.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: In-line straight-through, threaded, galvanized steel fittings and Type C conduit bodies only; do not use bends or tees, e.g., Lbs.

1. Bonding and Grounding Locknuts and Wedges: Malleable iron with set screws and lug screws.

2. Insulated Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C.

3. Bonding and Grounding Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs or lug screws.

4. Sealing Fittings: Threaded type conduit seal fittings and sealing compound suitable for hazardous location installations in accordance with CEC:
a. Crouse-Hind retrofit sealing fitting EYSR.
b. Crouse-Hind CHICO A sealing compound.

C. All conduits must be proofed using a mandrel.

2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS
A. Type EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1021

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-5

1. In-line straight-through steel or malleable iron fittings and Type C conduit bodies only; do not use bends or tees, e.g. LBs.

2. Wet Areas: Steel compression-type couplings and nipples.

3. Dry Areas: Set screw-type couplings and nipples.

4. Bonding Locknuts:
a. Malleable iron with set screws and lug screws.
b. Insulated Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150C. c. Bonding and Grounding Bushing: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150C, with solderless lugs or lug screws.

C. All conduits must be proofed by using a mandrel.

D. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Conduit

1. Schedule 40
a. PVC Schedule 40 type conduit fittings shall be the same manufacturer as conduit.

All plastic conduit and fittings shall have solvent-weld connections and shall provide a watertight joint.
b. Straight sections of single bore PVC Schedule 40 conduit can be manually bent to form curves with a radius 40 feet or greater.
c. All field formed long radius bends must be able to pass a 12-inches long by 3 5/8- inch wide solid ‘slug’ or ‘mouse’ mandrel.

2.5 CONDUIT ACCESSORIES
A. Pull String: Measuring and pulling string constructed of synthetic fiber with plastic jacket.

B. Pull Tape: Measuring and pulling tape constructed of synthetic fiber with plastic jacket, printed with accurate sequential footage marks.

1. George-Ingraham 1/2-inch tape 9216-JK.

2. Mule Tape.

2.6 PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS
A. Firestopping: Provide fire barrier penetration sealing materials as specified in Division 07, Firestopping Section.

B. Approved horizontal penetration pathway system.

1. STI EZ-PATH
a. Default and standard is 4-inch pathways; part numbers will change if not 4-inch as specified with the following:
1) Part Number:
(a) EZDP44S2, Series 44+ with wall mounting kits. Single device shall have wall plate mounting kit included:
(1) EZEZP144W.
(b) All Pathway devices require:
(1) EZRCM44s radius control modules.
(c) Extension Modules:
(1) EZD44ES, 6-inch extension module.
2) Bond to grounding system.
b. Ganged multiple pathways provide the following ganged mounting brackets for the number of devices required:
1) 1-5 pathways:
(a) EZP544W.
2) 6 pathways:
(a) EZP644W.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1022

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28-6
3) Up to 10 pathways:
(a) EZP544WD.
4) Up to 12 pathways:
(a) EZP644WD.

2.7 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch deep, galvanized steel for use with single- and double-gang plaster rings, based on conditions. Typical outlets require single- gang plaster rings.

B. Five Square Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch deep with built-in cable management for use with single- and double-gang plaster rings, based on conditions. Typical outlets require single-gang plaster rings.

1. Approved manufacturer and part number:
a. Randl P/N T-55017.

C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: Minimum 5-inch square by 2-7/8-inch-deep. Provide gasketed, watertight single- or double-gang cover, based on conditions.

D. Floor Boxes for Installation in Cast-In-Place Concrete Floors: Flush mounted and fully adjustable formed steel as shown on the Drawings. Floor boxes provided by Division 26, Electrical.

E. Plaster Rings: Single- or Double-gang.

F. Poke-Through Floor Boxes

2.8 PULL BOXES
A. Construction: NEMA Standard No. 250. Type 1 galvanized steel enclosures designed for use as junction boxes and pull boxes with flat screw-applied covers, with or without knockouts and gray enamel finish. See Division 27 section related to proper pull box sizing.

2.9 J-HOOKS
A. Constructed of galvanized steel, stainless steel, hot dipped zinc, plenum rated materials.

B. Wires, all-thread, pencil-rod, metal bracket supports mounted to structure.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1023

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-1
SECTION 27 15 00

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Station Cabling

2. Insert Outlets

3. Face Plates

4. Patch Panels

5. Patch Cords

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 27, Communications and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. Use this Section in conjunction with other Division 27, Communications specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total general requirements for the project communications systems and equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Meet requirements of NFPA 780, Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems.

C. ANSI/TIA-568 series, most recent revisions, addenda and systems bulletins. All applicable.

D. ANSI/TIA–569 Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces, most recent revision including all relevant addenda and systems bulletins.

E. ANSI/TIA–862 Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent Building Systems, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.

F. ANSI/TIA–942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.

G. ANSI/TIA–1179 Healthcare Facility Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.

H. ANSI/TIA–4966 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Educational Facilities, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.

I. TIA–TSB–162 Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points, most recent revision including all addenda and systems bulletins.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1024

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-2
B. In addition, provide:

1. Shop Drawings - RCDD Stamped
a. Contractor will provide as-built electronic files in CAD format, containing the contract document drawing files, for use in the preparing of the shop drawings, by the contractor’s project dedicated RCDD.
b. Submit Overall Floor Plans: floor and site plans showing the locations of devices and cable routing, cabling pathways and vaults, with cable types and quantity called out.
c. Submit Shop drawings for the entire structured cabling system and grounding and bonding system, identifying such items as PBB, SBB, TBB, rack elevations, cabling pathways and pathway infrastructure, cable runway and other pathways. d. Shop Drawings that include, but are not limited to, the following:

Telecommunication Room layout, Telecommunication Room wall elevations, equipment rack elevations, cable routing, cable connecting diagrams, termination pin outs, supporting hardware details, block diagrams, riser diagrams, all primary and secondary cable pathways. Work may not begin until shop drawings are approved. Note: Intent of submitting shop drawings is for contractors to display a conceptual understanding of the issued Engineer drawings. Do not submit engineer's drawing on your title block.

2. Product Information
a. Catalog cut sheets and information directly related to each individual item being submitted. Identification of items must contain the physical and dimensional information, performance data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication, and material finish. Clearly indicate on each sheet what is being submitted on with red rectangles and red arrows.

3. Wiring Diagrams

4. Rack Elevation Drawings

5. Qualifications
a. Submit Contractor current and valid RCDD credential holder on staff; must be Full Time Employee (FTE).

6. Contractor Technicians assigned to the project along with SCS manufacturer certifications. Must be current and in good standing.
a. Manufacturer:
1) CommScope
2) Leviton
3) Panduit
4) Or approved equivalent

7. Contractor Technicians assigned to the project and their BICSI installer credentials.

Current and in good standing.

8. Procedures for cable labeling and identification, long term documentation methods and numbering scheme in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606C.

9. Installation contractor shall have certified BICSI certifications for installers as well as RCDDs (Registered Communications Distribution Designer) and warranty certificates for products proposed. The installation contractor must be able to provide the cabling manufacturer’s structured cabling warranty for which is being proposed, at the time of bidding and installation of which extends and continues with the backbone specification. a. Certifications:
1) BICSI:
(a) RCDD
(b) Installer 2, Copper (INTSC)
(c) Installer 2, Optical Fiber (INSTF)
(d) Technician (TECH)
2) Manufacturer:
(a) CommScope - Systimax
(b) Leviton
(c) Panduit:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1025

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-3
(1) Technicians installing any Copper Distribution Systems shall have a current Panduit Certified Copper Technicians certificate. (2) Technicians installing any Fiber Distribution Systems shall have a current Panduit Certified Fiber Technicians certificate. (d) Or approved equivalent.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Manufacturers to have a recognized certified installer program in place for system components proposed. Cable will be approved with manufacturer system installed.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 27 00 00, Communications Basic Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Structured Cabling System (SCS) warranty and conditions for a period of no less than the following per manufacturer:

1. CommScope: 25 Years
a. Contractor shall be in good standing with CommScope to offer the extended warranty. Validation is required at time of submittals. b. Extended Product Warranty. CommScope warrants, for a period of twenty-five (25) years from the Certification Date (the “Warranty Period”), that Products in the Registered System shall be free from defects in materials or workmanship subject, to the terms and conditions below and the terms, conditions and limitations of CommScope’s Limited Product Warranty in effect at the date of sale (available at http://www.commscope.com/Resources/Warranties/).
c. Application Warranty. During the Warranty Period, the Registered System will meet or exceed the specifications set forth in the System Specification and support Applications as documented therein.
d. System Warranty Requirements. The System Warranty applies only to Products that are:
1) Installed by an Authorized Partner, at the location listed on the System Warranty Certificate;
2) Installed in compliance with CommScope’s written design, engineering and installation procedures, and the specifications for the Application and the System Specification;
3) Designed, installed, and maintained in compliance with the applicable industry standards as set forth in the System Specification; 4) Not subject to conditions that exceed the individual Product Specification(s); 5) Used at the original site of installation;
6) Tested pursuant to industry standards and applicable CommScope testing requirements and satisfactorily pass such tests; and
7) Not otherwise expressly excluded or invalidated under the System Warranty Terms and Conditions. To qualify for a System Warranty, all documents, including the prescribed System test results, must be submitted to CommScope for review within sixty (60) days of installation, and registration for the System Warranty must be applied for with CommScope within ninety (90) days from the date the installation is complete. CommScope, in its sole judgment, shall determine if the System Warranty Requirements have been met. CommScope’s approval of a System Warranty shall be evidenced by a numbered registration System Warranty Certificate issued by CommScope.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1026

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-4
In the event a System Warranty Certificate is issued and CommScope subsequently discovers that any of the System Warranty requirements were not met, then the System Warranty shall be void. Beneficiary and Warranty Transfer. CommScope will only honor System Warranty claims made by the person or entity to which the System Warranty Certificate is issued. The System Warranty may, upon prior written approval from CommScope, be transferred to a successor in interest to the site where the Registered System was originally installed.
e. Modifications: Moves, repairs, alterations, additions, or changes to the Registered System (“Change(s)”) are only covered by the System Warranty if:
1) Performed by an Authorized Partner;
2) Installed in compliance with CommScope’s written design, engineering and installation procedures, and the specifications for the Application and the System Specification, and
3) Designed, installed, and maintained in compliance with the applicable industry standards as set forth in the System Specification. Day-to-day administration and maintenance of the Registered System by the End- Customer will not void the System Warranty if performed in compliance with applicable CommScope system design and installation guidelines using CommScope approved products. All test results shall be sent for approval to CommScope along with a detailed description of the Change(s) and bill of materials within thirty (30) days of installation. If the Change(s) are approved, CommScope shall update the System Warranty registration to indicate the Change(s). Failure to comply with the foregoing relating to Change(s) shall void the System Warranty.
f. Exclusions from Warranty and Limitations on Liability. The "Exclusions from Warranty” and “Limitations on Liability” in the Limited Product Warranty shall apply to the System Warranty. The occurrence of an Exclusion from Warranty in the Limited Product Warranty shall void the System Warranty. The System Warranty shall also be void if any Product in the Registered System has been:
1) Removed from the original site of installation,
2) Altered, repaired or disassembled by a non-Authorized Partner, or 3) Exposed to, or has outside materials applied to it, including but not limited to paint, water, chemicals, solutions, cleaning supplies and lubricants (“Contamination”). End-Customer must notify an Authorized Partner or CommScope within 24 hours of any Contamination. Terms and Conditions CommScope Network Infrastructure System 25 Year Extended Product and Application Warranty (“System Warranty”) 3 Outside Plant Cable is excluded from and will void the System Warranty when installed above ground and exposed to the outside environment, including but not limited to, an aerial installation. Outside Plant Cable installed underground, either by direct burial or in conduit, is not excluded from the System Warranty. g. Failure of the End-Customer to submit any System Warranty claim to the authorized CommScope office as designated by CommScope within thirty (30) days following expiration of the System Warranty shall be an admission by the End-Customer and conclusive proof that the Registered System and Product(s) are in every respect as warranted and shall release CommScope and the Authorized Partner from any and all claims for damage or loss sustained by the End-Customer.
h. Any violation or non-compliance with the System Warranty Terms and Conditions will void the System Warranty.
i. Remedies:
1) If during the Warranty Period, the End-Customer experiences problems with a Registered System or a Product in a Registered System (“Problem”) and suspects there is a potential warranty claim hereunder, the End-Customer must first reasonably investigate potential causes of the suspected Problem October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1027

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-5
that are not CommScope related and reasonably determine that none of these potential causes were responsible for the Problem. Once the End Customer reasonably believes that all non-CommScope causes for the Problem are ruled out, but in no event more than thirty (30) days after the End-Customer knew or should have known of the Problem, the End- Customer must contact the Authorized Partner that installed the Registered System to report the Problem. If the Authorized Partner is unable to resolve the Problem, then the Authorized Partner will contact CommScope and make a claim under the System Warranty for further investigation and resolution. If CommScope determines that a Problem is due to a breach of the System Warranty, CommScope will repair or replace Product as CommScope deems necessary to correct the Problem, including the provision of reasonable labor and removal and reinstallation of such Product at CommScope’s discretion. CommScope shall only be responsible for costs that have received the prior written authorization of CommScope. If CommScope chooses to repair Product, CommScope may use new or reconditioned replacement parts. If CommScope chooses to replace Product, CommScope may replace with new or reconditioned products of the same or similar design. Any repair or replacement will be warranted for either
(a) 90 days or
(b) The remainder of the original Warranty Period, whichever is longer. If the Problem is found by CommScope or an Authorized Partner not to be related to a Product or any warranty exclusions, then End- Customer will be responsible for any costs incurred related to the Problem claim.
j. Choice of Law
1) The System Warranty shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of North Carolina, U.S.A. The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.

The End-Customer acknowledges that as a condition to receiving the System Warranty, End-Customer unconditionally submits to the jurisdiction of the North Carolina state and federal courts. If any portion of the System Warranty is not enforceable due to local legal requirements, then such specific language shall be modified to meet local legal requirements consistent with CommScope’s intent.

2. Leviton: Limited Lifetime
Product
Family
Product
Series
Standard Limited
Product Warranty
System Warranties -
Certified Projects
Category
Rated
Commercial
Grade
Structured
Cabling
System
Products
Copper
Systems
(Category 5e,
6, 6A, 8)
Fiber Optic
Systems
Fiber
Enclosures
Cable
Management
1-Year Limited Lifetime Warranty
for North America, Peru,
Columbia, and Ecuador
25-Years for Rest of World
Structured
Media
Enclosures
(Metal &
Plastic)
2-Years Limited Lifetime Warranty
for North America, Peru,
Columbia, and Ecuador
25-Years for Rest of World
Multiple Active 2-Years Not Applicable
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1028

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-6
Product
Family
Product
Series
Standard Limited
Product Warranty
System Warranties -
Certified Projects
Dwelling Unit
(MDU)
Systems
Telephone
Products
Active Video
Products
Active Data
Products
Commercial
Grade IT/AV
Products
Active
Audiovisual
Signal
Extension and
Audio
Components
2-Years Not Applicable
HDMI Cables 1-Year Not Applicable
Power
Distribution
Units (PDUs)
with Surge
Protection
5500 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $25,000
5505 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $10,000
P1070 Series 3-Years Connected Equipment
Warranty Duration - 3-
Years
Pro-rated Connected
Equipment Coverage Max
- $25,000
Power
Distribution
Units (PDUs)
4520 Series 3-Years Not Applicable
P1020 / P1040
Series
3-Years Not Applicable

3. SYSTEM WARRANTY AND EXCLUSIONS
a. Subject to the limitations and conditions set forth herein, Leviton (the "Manufacturer”) warrant to the end-user, for the duration of the warranty, and not for the benefit of anyone else, that the structured cabling and connectivity hardware products (the “Products”) comprising the Leviton structured cabling system (the "System”) installed at the indicated project site will:
1) Be free from defects in material and workmanship.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1029

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-7
2) Meet or exceed applicable ratified TIA and ISO/IEC link/channel transmission performance standards in effect at the time of installation. 3) Support any current or future application which is designed for transmission over a structured cabling system as defined by the above referenced standards in effect at the time of installation.
b. Warranty Exclusions
1) Products used in the System, which were not specifically designated as being eligible for coverage under this warranty.
2) Products used in the System, which were not supplied directly by the Manufacturer or through channels approved by the Manufacturer. 3) Products used in the System, which were falsely or incorrectly represented as being in compliance with the warranty registration requirements of this warranty or were not included in the registration documents that were submitted to obtain coverage under this warranty.
4) Defects caused by work performed outside of the Leviton work area, patching or equipment cords, or from moves, additions, and changes by parties other than a Certified Integrator/Installer, or an authorized contractor or personnel of the Manufacturer.
5) Defects resulting from non-compliant or improper System design, installation, use, repair or System alterations, misuse, neglect, accident or abuse.
6) Defects or System failures caused by events beyond reasonable control of the Manufacturer including, without limitation, act or omissions of customer, acts of God or government, such as, natural disasters or storms, fire, flood, water damage, paint or chemicals exposure, political strife, labor disputes, failure or delay of transportation, or unavailability of parts or personnel. 7) Products and System exposed to fire, smoke, water, paint, chemicals, solvents, or other elements for which the product was not designed. 8) Products and System exposed to operating conditions outside of the product’s stated ratings or intended use.
9) Power over Ethernet (PoE), Power over HDBASE-T (POH) and Remote Powering Applications: Leviton structured cabling products are designed and tested to be compliant with the electrical requirements for PoE, PoE+, POH, and remote powering applications as specified in the IEC 60512-99- 001 standard. Remote powering applications in which the electrical energy or connector cycling exceeds the defined operating requirements of IEC 60512-99-001 may lead to excessive arcing damage to the connector interface and are not covered under this warranty.
c. Warranty Remedy
1) For valid warranty claims, the Manufacturer will, at its sole discretion, using a Certified Integrator/Installer or personnel of the Manufacturer’s choosing replace, repair, or provide credit for any qualified System products found to be non-compliant and cover reasonable costs of labor to affect necessary work.
d. Warranty Limitations
1) This warranty is exclusive and in lieu of all other warranties, whether express, implied or statutory, including but not limited to any Warranty of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose, non-infringement or any other matter. The remedies provided for in the preceding paragraphs shall constitute the sole remedy of end-user, against the manufacturer for breach of any obligations to end user, whether the claim is made in tort or in contract, including claims based on Warranty, negligence, strict liability, fraud, misrepresentation, or otherwise.
2) In no event shall Manufacturer be liable for special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages (regardless of the form of action, whether in contract or in tort, including negligence), including without limitation, lost October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1030

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-8
sales or profits, lost data, System downtime, System outages, loss of use of the System or economic damage arising out of the failure of the System or the Products that form part of the System. The maximum aggregate liability of the Manufacturer for any claims for damage arising out of or connected with this warranty shall not exceed the end user/customer price paid for the Products giving rise to a claim. Labor claims will be paid in the form of product credit for the replacement or repair of only the defective product(s). 3) This warranty is non-transferable and shall not benefit any party or parties other than the stated System end-user, first to use the system and is subject to the individual Product warranty Terms & Conditions of the Manufacturer. 4) This warranty does not cover Systems which are no longer in use or which are no longer used for their originally intended purpose. e. Warranty Claims Requirements
1) Proper System design, installation, use and maintenance must be demonstrated to the Manufacturer.
2) System documentation and maintenance records, all of which are the responsibility of the end-user, must be made available upon request. End- user shall provide free access to the System to original Certified Integrator/Installer, and the Manufacturer authorized personnel. f. Claim Procedure
1) Valid claims require the end-user to first resolve all non-connectivity hardware and non-cable related causes.
2) Warranty claims shall promptly be first made to the original Certified Integrator/Installer or the local representative of the Manufacturer. Proof of warranty must be furnished by person making claim.
3) System repair or replacement due to component failure will be performed only after the Manufacturer has reviewed and verified the System fails to meet the applicable ratified TIA and ISO/IEC link/channel transmission performance standards in effect at the time of installation prior to removal, replacement, or repair of any defective System Products.

4. Panduit: 25 Years
a. Contractor shall provide a 25-year Panduit Certification PlusSM System Warranty on all copper and fiber links and/or channels.
b. Panduit® Certification PlusSM warranty shall meet the following criteria:
1) A 25-year guarantee that the installed cabling system will pass the Commercial Building Telecommunications Standards cited in this document. 2) This warranty will cover all registered links and/or channels. 3) Contractor shall indicate in warranty documentation whether registered links are to be link or channel.
4) If links are covered, this warranty may be invoked only if the links are comprised entirely of Panduit components and cable.
5) If channels are covered, this warranty may be invoked only if entire channel links are comprised of continuous Panduit comp
c. The communications Contractor will correct any problems and malfunctions that are warranty–related issues without charge for the entire warranty period. d. If the Certification PlusSM warranty is needed by the owner within the warranted period and the original installer is no longer in business, Panduit shall find a substitute Panduit ONESM certified contractor and assume costs to fulfill the obligations of the warranty.
e. Upon acceptance of the warranty paperwork and test results from the Contractor, Panduit will mail a notification letter to the installer and a notification letter with warranty certificate to the owner
f. The warranty period shall commence following the final acceptance of the project by the owner and written confirmation of warranty from Panduit.

5. Or approved equivalent.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1031

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-9
C. In addition, provide:

1. Labor, materials, and documentation according to selected manufacturer requirements necessary to ensure that the Owner will be furnished with an Extended Product Warranty and Application Assurance. The Application Assurance Warranty will cover the failure of the wiring system to support current or future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. These applications include, but are not limited to, 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T, 10GBASE-T and 155 Mb/s ATM.

2. A warranty on the physical installation and manufacturer defects.

3. Necessary documentation required by the manufacturer immediately following 100 percent testing of cables.

D. Administer the warranty process with the responsible manufacturer's representative. Provide warranty directly to the Owner from the manufacturer. Ensure that the manufacturer provides the Owner with the appropriate warranty certification within 90 calendar days of the final project completion.

1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a standards-based structured cabling system (SCS) to serve horizontal communication systems requirements as specified and as shown on Drawings. Closely follow ANSI/TIA, BICSI, IEEE, and ISO standards.

B. The horizontal distribution subsystem refers to intrabuilding and in some instances or conditions interbuilding twisted-pair communications cabling connecting telecommunications rooms (TRs) to telecommunications outlets (TOs) or work area outlets (WAOs) at individual work areas, and identified network device locations that consists of the following:

1. Category 6A 100 ohm, 4-pair, unshielded twisted pair cables from the telecom rooms to the outlets.

2. The horizontal system includes cables, insert outlets, faceplates, patch panels and patch cords, wall field termination blocks, as well as the necessary cabling support systems, such as cable management.

3. Cables are routed through basket tray, cable runway, conduit, fire rated pathways, J- Hooks, sleeves spaces below raised floors, open ceiling areas, non-ventilated spaces above ceiling tile and through plenum air-handling spaces above ceiling tile.

4. Furnish and install materials and miscellaneous items that are necessary for a complete and working system.

1.8 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS
A. Final closeout documents including, but not limited to, test results on a CD-ROM or USB drive, in native tester format, project manual that includes manufacturer and contractor warranties, product cut sheets, material submittals, etc. Also, include the following:

1. Electronic files in raw native tester software format, PDF, and hard copy documentation of test results for every cable and cable segment and link in 3- ring binder.

2. Provide ''As-Built'' Drawings in same AutoCAD Version as provided by Contractor in Part 1 Submittals of this document.

3. ''As-Built'' Drawings indicating location of all equipment including but not limited to work area outlets, patch panels, cross connect blocks, on each segment and cable routing outlet and identifiers. Indicate labeling for each piece of equipment.

4. As-Built Drawings will contain all installed cabling and materials. Outlets will be numbered with each cable associated with the work area outlet.

B. Place a laminated full–size, minimum “C” sized, floor plan of these drawings (coordinate with Owner) on the wall of each telecommunications room (TR), showing area covered, data locations, and cable labeling.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1032

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-10

1. Provide owner with a PDF and Autocad file and/or Revit for the final as-built, to adequately maintain current conditions for all future moves, adds, and changes (MACs).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STATION CABLING
A. Category 6A Unshielded Twisted Pair: 100 ohm, Category 6A, 23 AWG, Solid Conductor, 4-pair unshielded twisted pair, UL Listed CMP - LP (.6A - .7A) rated. Compliant to TIA-568.2-D-2 Balanced Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standard Addendum 2 August 2020.

1. All cabling shall incorporate the use of permanent labeling, with labels furnished and installed by contractor within 4-inch to 6-inch of each cable end. Labels are required at both the station end behind the faceplate and at the patch panel termination.

2. Manufacturer:
a. Panduit: Turn Tell
1) Part Number: R100X125X1J
b. No Substitutions.

B. Horizontal Cabling:

1. Manufacturer:
a. CommScope
1) Systimax 2091B, Category 6A, CMP, Cable Diameter: 0.285-inch. (a) Part Numbers:
(1) 760107201 - Blue
(2) 760154039 - Light Blue
(3) 760107268 - White
(4) 760107250 - Slate
(5) 760107276 - Yellow
(6) 760107219 - Green
(7) 760107201 - Red
(8) 760107235 - Purple
(9) 760118497 - Pink
(10) 760107235 - Orange
(11) 760185900 - Black
2) Outside Plant (OSP), Category 6A, Indoor/Outdoor, Plenum, Cable Diameter: 0.270-inch.
(a) Part Numbers:
(1) 874019204 - Blue
(2) 874033804 - White
(3) 874021504 - Gray
(4) 874036404 - Black
b. Leviton
1) LANmark-SST Category 6A, CMP – LP (.7A), Cable Diameter: 0.250-inch. (a) Part Numbers:
(1) 11140627 - Blue
(2) 11140628 - White
(3) 11140629 - Dark Gray
(4) 11140630 - Yellow
(5) 11140631 - Green
(6) 11140632 - Red
(7) 11140634 - Violet
(8) 11140635 - Orange
(9) 11140633 - Black
2) LANmark-10G, OSP, Category 6A, Cable Diameter: 0.355-inch. c. Panduit
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1033

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-11
1) GenSPEED 10 MTP, Category 6A, CMP, Cable Diameter: 0.230-inch. (a) Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by owner prior to purchase and installation)
(1) 7151849 - Blue
(2) 7151850 - White
(3) 7151851 - Gray
(4) 7151852 - Yellow
(5) 7151853 - Green
(6) 7151854 - Red
(7) 7151855 - Purple
(8) 7151856 - Orange
(9) 7151857 - Pink
(10) 7151858 - Black
2) Panduit Vari-Matrix High Density Category 6A, CMP – LP (.7A), Cable Diameter: 0.230-inch.
(a) Part Number: (Color(s) to be approved by owner prior to purchase and installation)
(1) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Blue
(2) PUP6AHD04BU-G - White
(3) PUP6AHD04IG-G - International Gray
(4) PUP6AHD04YL-G - Yellow
(5) PUP6AHD04GR-G - Green
(6) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Red
(7) PUP6AHD04VL-G - Violet
(8) PUP6AHD04OR-G - Orange
(9) PUP6AHD04BU-G - Black
3) Panduit TX6A Category 6A, OSP, Indoor/Outdoor, CMP-LP (.8A), Color Black.
(a) Part Number: PUO6AS04BL-G
4) General Cable, Category 6A, OSP, Indoor/Outdoor, CMP, Color Black. (a) Part Number: 7141007
d. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 INSERT OUTLETS
A. Manufacturer:

1. CommScope
a. GigaSPEED X10D, Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), modular inserts.

Colors are to be approved by Owner for each system, prior to purchase and installation.
1) MGS600 X10D Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
(a) 760092361 - MGS600-003 - Black
(b) 760092379 - MGS600-112 - Orange
(c) 760092387 - MGS600-123 - Yellow
(d) 760092478 - MGS600-148 - Almond
(e) 760092395 - MGS600-215 - Cream
(f) 760092403 - MGS600-226 - Green
(g) 760092411 - MGS600-246 - Ivory
(h) 760092429 - MGS600-262 - White
(i) 760092437 - MGS600-270 - Gray
(j) 760092445 - MGS600-317 - Red
(k) 760092452 - MGS600-318 - Blue
(l) 760092460 - MGS600-361 - Violet

2. Leviton
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1034

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-12
a. Atlas-X1 Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), QuickPort Insert. With Shutter, UL 2043 Plenum Certified.
1) Will exceed IEEE 802.3bt standard up to 0.5 amps per conductor (100 watts) continuously.
2) ETL verified to meet the IEC 60512-99-002 standard for support of IEEE 802.3bt Type 4 PoE (90-watt) applications. ANSI/TIA-568.2-D (Cat 6A). 3) ISO/IEC 11801-1 (Class EA). ANSI/TIA-1096-A (formerly FCC Part 68). 4) IEEE 802.3bt PoE Type 1 (15.4 Watts) formerly 802.3af, Type 2 (30 Watts) formerly 802.3at, Type 3 (60 Watts), Type 4 (90 Watts). Cisco UPoE (60 Watts), UPoE+ (90 Watts).
b. Power over HDBaseT™ PoH (95 Watts).
1) Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
(a) 6AUJK-SW6 - White
(b) 6AUJK-ST6 - Almond
(c) 6AUJK-SI6 - Ivory
(d) 6AUJK-SY6 - Yellow
(e) 6AUJK-SO6 - Orange
(f) 6AUJK-SC6 - Crimson
(g) 6AUJK-SR6 - Red
(h) 6AUJK-SP6 - Purple
(i) 6AUJK-SL6 - Blue
(j) 6AUJK-SV6 - Green
(k) 6AUJK-SG6 - Gray
(l) 6AUJK-SE6 - Black
(m) 6AUJK-SB6 - Brown

3. Panduit
a. Component of the MaTrix 10Gig Mini-Com TX6A Solution. Category 6A, 8-position 8-Conductor (8P8C), Shuttered Modular insert shall terminate 4-pairs, 22 – 26 AWG, 100 ohm unshielded twisted pair cable and shall not require use of a punch down tool. The termination cap shall be color-coded blue to designate Category 6A performance and shall include a universal label coded for T568A and T568B wiring schemes. The Mini-Com® TX6A™ 10Gig UTP Jack Module must be installed as part of the TX6A™ 10Gig UTP Copper Cabling System to achieve IEEE 10GBASE-T certified performance.
b. Rated for 2500 cycles with IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at and 802.3bt type 3 and type 4.

Supports Power over HDBaseT up to 100 watts.
c. UL 1863 (Use as communications circuit accessory).
d. UL 2043 (Suitable for use in air-handling spaces).
e. Part Numbers: (Color(s) to be approved by Owner prior to purchase and installation)
1) CJH6X88TGIW - Off White
2) CJH6X88TGEI - Electric Ivory
3) CJH6X88TGIG - International Gray
4) CJH6X88TGAW - Arctic White
5) CJH6X88TGBL - Black
6) CJH6X88TGBU - Blue
7) CJH6X88TGRD - Red
8) CJH6X88TGYL - Yellow
9) CJH6X88TGGR - Green
10) CJH6X88TGOR - Orange
11) CJH6X88TGBR - Brown
12) CJH6X88TGGD - Gold
13) CJH6X88TGLB - Light Blue
14) CJH6X88TGPK - Pink
15) CJH6X88TGVL - Violet
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1035

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-13
16) EGJT-1 - Termination tool
(a) Ensures conductors are fully terminated by utilizing a smooth forward motion without impact on critical internal components for maximum reliability.
17) TGJT - Termination tool
(a) Ideal for high volume installations.
18) CWST - Wire Snipping Tool
19) CJAST - Cable Stripping Tool

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.3 FACE PLATES
A. Color(s) to be approved by Owner and coordinated with architectural finishes prior to purchase and installation. All unused ports shall have a matching dust cover blank installed by Contractor.

B. Face Plates must have window designations (DESI’s) for labeling.

C. Manufacturer:

1. CommScope
a. Single Gang:
1) Wall Phone, Stainless Steel Type Flush Mounted Faceplate, one-port, phone studs, 4-inch lug spacing.
(a) Part Number: 760100891 – M10LW4SP
2) Wall Phone, Stainless Steel Type Flush Mounted Faceplate, two port, phone studs.
(a) Part Number: 760249557
3) One-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108258401 – M10L-003 – Black
(b) 108258419 – M10L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108258427 – M10L-262 – White
(d) 108258435 – M10L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072074 – M11SP-L – Stainless
4) Two-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168485 – M12L-003 – Black
(b) 108168477 – M12L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168469 – M12L-262 – White
(d) 108168451 – M12L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072181 – M12SP-L – Stainless
5) Three-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168527 – M13L-003 – Black
(b) 108168519 – M13L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168501 – M13L-262 – White
(d) 108168493 – M13L-270 – Gray
(e) 76002199 – M13SP-L – Stainless
6) Four-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168568 – M14L-003 – Black
(b) 108168550 – M14L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168543 – M14L-262 – White
(d) 108168535 – M14L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072207 – M14SP-L – Stainless
7) Six-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108168600 – M16L-003 – Black
(b) 108168592 – M16L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108168584 – M16L-262 – White
(d) 108168576 – M16L-270 – Gray
(e) 760072215 – M16SP-L – Stainless
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1036

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-14
b. Double Gang:
1) Eight-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 108685009 – M28L-003 – Black
(b) 108685017 – M28L-246 – Ivory
(c) 108685025 – M28L-262 – White
(d) 760100883 – M28SP-L – Stainless
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB):
1) One-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107983983 – M101SMB-B-003 – Black
(b) 107984007 – M101SMB-B-246 – Ivory
(c) 107984023 – M101SMB-B-270 – Gray
(d) 107984015 – M101SMB-B-262 – White
2) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) 760067207 – M202 Plenum SMB-262
(b) 107984031 – M102SMB-B-003 – Black
(c) 107984049 – M102SMB-B-246 – Ivory
(d) 107984056 – M102SMB-B-262 – White
(e) 107984064 – M102SMB-B-270 – Gray
3) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107952475 – M104SMB-A-003 – Black
(b) 107952442 – M104SMB-A-246 – Ivory
(c) 107952459 – M104SMB-A-262 – White
(d) 107952467 – M104SMB-A-270 – Gray
4) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) 107431520 – M106SMB-003 – Black
(b) 107431546 – M106SMB-246 – Ivory
(c) 107431538 – M106SMB-262 – White
(d) 107431553 – M106SMB-270 – Gray
5) (12) Port: Part Number:
(a) 106658164 – M112SMB-003 – Black
(b) 106658149 – M112SMB-246 – Ivory
(c) 106658156 – M112SMB-262 – White
(d) 106658419 – M112SMB-270 – Gray
d. Furniture - Includes all material for adapters and bezels. It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the furniture systems.
1) Four-Port: Part Number: Used with M Series modular information outlet. (a) 760118240 – M14CE-E-003 – Black
(b) 760118232 – M14CE-E-262 – White
(c) 760118257 – M14CE-E-246 – Ivory
(d) 760118265 – M14CE-E-270 – Gray
2) Used with SL, SLX outlets.
(a) 1933134-1 – 4-Port, Black, Flexmode
(b) 1933134-2 – 4-Port, Light Almond, Flexmode
(c) 1933134-4 – 4-Port, Gray, Flexmode
e. Dust Cover Blank.
1) Dust cover blanks shall be installed by contractor for all faceplates where an insert is not M20 installed. For M-Series Faceplates and inserts. (a) Part Number:
(1) 107065583 – M20AP-003 – Black
(2) 107067860 – M20AP-246 – Ivory
(3) 107067928 – M20AP-262 – White
(4) 107067951 – M20AP-270 – Gray

2. Leviton
a. Single Gang, QuickPort wall plate with ID windows:
1) Wall phone wall plate, recessed stainless steel, QuickPort.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1037

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-15
(a) Part Number: 4108W-1SP
2) Wall phone wall plate, stainless steel, QuickPort.
(a) Part Number: 4108W-SP
3) One-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-1WS – White
(b) 42080-1TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-1IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-1GS – Grey
(e) 42080-1ES – Black
4) Two-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-2WS – White
(b) 42080-2TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-2IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-2GS – Grey
(e) 42080-2ES – Black
5) Four-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-4WS – White
(b) 42080-4TS – Light Almond
(c) 42080-4IS – Ivory
(d) 42080-4GS – Grey
(e) 42080-4ES – Black
b. Double Gang:
1) Six-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-6WP – White
(b) 42080-6TP – Light Almond
(c) 42080-6IP – Ivory
(d) 42080-GP – Grey
(e) 42080-6EP – Black
2) Eight-Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-6WP – White
(b) 42080-6TP – Light Almond
(c) 42080-6IP – Ivory
(d) 42080-8GSp – Grey
(e) 42080-8EP – Black
3) (12) Port: Part Number, QuickPort Inserts:
(a) 42080-12W – White
(b) 42080-12T – Light Almond
(c) 42080-12I – Ivory
(d) 42080-12G – Grey
(e) 42080-12E – Black
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB), QuickPort Inserts:
1) One- Port: Plenum Rated Part Number:
(a) 41089-1WP – White
(b) 41089-1EP – Black
(c) 41089-1IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-1GP – Grey
2) Two-Port: Plenum Rated Part Number:
(a) 41089-2WP – White
(b) 41089-2EP – Black
(c) 41089-2TP – Light Almond
(d) 41089-2IP – Ivory
(e) 41089-2WGP – Grey
3) QuickPort Brackets, Part Numbers:
(a) 49223-CB0 – QuickPort, In-Ceiling Bracket.
(b) 49223-CBC – QuickPort, In-Ceiling Bracket with Drop Ceiling Clip Kit. (c) 49223-W10 – QuickPort WAP (WiFi) Kit, Two Ports.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1038

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-16
(1) Two, C6A, (6AUJK-RW6-White) Atlas-X1 Inserts
(2) One, QuickPort Ceiling Bracket (49223-CBC)
(3) One, White, Two-Port Surface Mount Box (Plenum Rated) (4S089-2WP)
(4) Two, CMP, C6A solid conductor patch cords (AXPPP-10W) 10ft, White
(d) 49223-W1C – QuickPort (WiFi) Kit, One Port.
(1) One, C6A (6AUJK-RW6-White) Atlas-X1 Insert
(2) One, QuickPort Ceiling Bracket (49223-CBC)
(3) One, White, Two-Port Surface Mount Box (Plenum Rated) (4S089-2WP) (CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND FURNISH

ONE BLANK)
(4) One, CMP, C6A solid conductor patch cord (AXPPP-10W) 10’, White
4) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-4WP – White
(b) 41089-4EP – Black
(c) 41089-4IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-4GP – Grey
5) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-6WP – White
(b) 41089-6EP – Black
(c) 41089-6IP – Ivory
(d) 41089-6GP – Grey
6) (12) Port: Part Number:
(a) 41089-12W – White
(b) 41089-12E – Black
(c) 41089-12I – Ivory
(d) 41089-12G – Grey
7) Surface Mount Housing Magnets, four, per pack:
(a) Part Number: 41030-SMJ
d. Furniture Faceplates - Includes all material for adapters and bezels for use with QuickPort Inserts. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the project selected furniture systems.
1) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) 49910-SW2 – White
(b) 49910-HW2 – White (Herman Miller)
(c) 49910-SE2 – Black
(d) 49910-HE2 – Black (Herman Miller)
(e) 49910-SI2 – Ivory
(f) 49910-HI2 – Ivory (Herman Miller)
(g) 49910-SG2 – Grey
(h) 49910-HG2 – Grey (Herman Miller)
2) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) 49910-SW4 – White
(b) 49910-EW4 – White (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(c) 49910-HW4 – White (Herman Miller)
(d) 49910-SE4 – Black
(e) 49910-EE4 – Black (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(f) 49910-HE4 – Black (Herman Miller)
(g) 49910-SI4 – Ivory
(h) 49910-EI4 – Ivory (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
(i) 49910-HI4 – Ivory (Herman Miller)
(j) 49910-SG4 – Grey
(k) 49910-EG4 – Grey (0.75-inch Extended Depth)
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1039

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-17
(l) 49910-HG4 – Grey (Herman Miller)

3. Panduit
a. Single Gang:
1) Wall Phone, Pan-Net, Mini-Com
(a) KWPY - Stainless Steel, Phone Plate
(b) Requires a NET-Key Keystone C6A insert
(1) Part Number: NK6X88MBL
(c) One-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL1WHY – White
(2) CFPL1EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL1BLY – Black
(4) CFPL1IGY – International Gray
(d) Two-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL2WHY – White
(2) CFPL2EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL2BLY – Black
(4) CFPL2IGY – International Gray
(5) CFPL2SY – Stainless Steel
(e) Four-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(1) CFPL4WHY – White
(2) CFPL4EIY – Electric Ivory
(3) CFPL4BLY – Black
(4) CFPL4IGY – International Gray
(5) CFPL4SY – Stainless Steel
b. Double Gang:
1) Four-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL4S-2GY – Stainless
2) Six-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL6S-2GY – Stainless
3) Eight-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPL8S-2GY – Stainless Steel
4) Ten-Port, Pan-Net, Mini-Com: Part Number:
(a) CFPE10WH-2GY – White
(b) CFPE10EI-2GY – Electric Ivory
(c) CFPE10IG-2GY – International Gray
(d) CFPE10BL-2GY – Black
(e) CFPL10S-2GY – Stainless Steel
c. Surface Mount Box (SMB):
1) Single Gang Surface Back Box.
2) One-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX1WH-A – White
3) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX2WH-AY – White
4) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX4WH-AY – White
5) Six-Port: Part Number:
(a) CBX6WH-AY – White
d. Furniture - Includes all material for adapters and bezels. It is the contractor's responsibility to provide and install a furniture faceplate solution that will be compatible with the furniture systems.
1) Two-Port: Part Number:
(a) CFFPL2BL – Black
2) Four-Port: Part Number:
(a) CFFPL4BL – Black
(b) CFFPHM4BL – Black (Herman Miller)
e. Blank Modules, Mini-Com:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1040

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-18
1) Part Number:
(a) CMBWH-X – White
(b) CMBBL-X – Black
(c) CMBIW-X – International White
(d) CMBBIG -X – International Gray
f. Mini-Com adaptor for Wiremold Frames:
1) Part Number
(a) CHI2MBL-X – Black (two-ports)
g. Mini-Com Water Resistant Faceplate: Includes combination head, gaskets, tamper resistant screws to secure to base. Requires adhesive labeling suited for the environment it resides in.
1) Part Number:
(a) CFPWRCIG – International Gray

4. Or approved equivalent.

2.4 PATCH PANELS
A. Patch Panels shall be used to house insert outlets on the originating side of Horizontal Cabling, including, but not limited to, spaces such as the MPOE, MTR, TR, and/or TE. Patch Panels shall adhere to the following specifications:

1. Shall be constructed as a modular frame for use with modular insert outlets. a. Rack mounted Patch Panels are strongly preferred. However, wall mounted Patch Panels may be used when a Telecommunications rack, cabinet, or enclosure is unavailable or lacking the required space.

2. Shall be sized appropriately, and provided in sufficient quantity, to house the quantity of modular insert outlets required in the associated Telecommunications Space. a. Contractor shall include a future growth factor equal to +25% when determining the size and quantity of Patch Panels.
b. Approved Patch Panel sized are as follows:
1) 1RU 24-Port.
2) 2RU 48-Port.
3) 1RU 48-Port.
(a) Shall be used only as required due to rack space limitations.

3. Shall be by the same manufacturer as the associated modular insert outlets. a. Shall be of the same product line as the associated modular insert outlets, where applicable.

B. Universal Patch Panels:

1. 19-inch rack-mounted panel capable of accepting up to 24 modular insert outlets.

2. 19-inch rack-mounted panel capable of accepting up to 48 modular insert outlets.

2.5 PATCH CORDS
A. A. Category 6A patch cords shall be used to connect networked devices and networking equipment to the Horizontal Cabling and shall adhere to the following specifications:

1. Shall be factory terminated with eight-position eight-contact modular connectors.

2. Shall be constructed using (4) pairs of stranded conductor wire.

3. Shall be provided in lengths appropriate for the intended use, with slack sufficient to properly dress the cable in accordance with established industry best practices. a. Excess slack shall be minimized.
b. Individual Patch Cords shall not exceed 25-Feet in length.

4. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used within the Main Telecommunications Room, Telecommunications Room(s), and/or the MPOE, and when not entering or exiting the room through any cabling pathway system:
a. Shall be constructed using 26-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be fire rated Communications Multipurpose (CM).

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1041

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00-19

5. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used to connect a device located indoors to a telecommunications outlet located within the same space:
a. Shall be constructed using 23-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be fire rated Communications Multipurpose, Plenum (CMP).

6. Unless otherwise noted on the drawing package or within the specifications, when used to connect a device located outdoors to a telecommunications outlet located indoors:
a. Shall be constructed using 23-28 AWG wire.
b. Shall be constructed with an outdoor rated, UV-resistant, weatherproof, jacket.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1042

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-1
SECTION 28 00 00

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Electronic Security System, including, but not limited to, the Access Control System, shall utilize a design-build concept throughout the duration of the project.

B. Electronic Safety System, including, but not limited to, the Fire Detection and Alarm System, shall utilize a design-bid-build concept throughout the duration of the project.

C. Work included in 28 00 00 applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make electronic safety and security systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.

1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Electronic Safety and Security system for this project.

B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.

1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.

B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.

C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.

1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.

B. Access Control and Intrusion Detection Criteria:

1. The project includes the furnishing and installation of a fully functional Library Access Control System. Contractor is responsible for providing all hardware, components, cabling, programming, and labor required for the installation of this system.

2. The intended function of the Library Access Control System is to allow for staffless entry into the new Maker Space on the 2nd floor. The system shall allow for Patrons to access the Maker Space through the use of a software-based schedule, maintained by the Owner, or by using their Library Card.

3. This project includes (1) Access Control Card Reader location, however, the approved system shall allow for expansion to many additional Card Reader locations and Library- focused services in the future.

4. Refer to Section 28 10 00, Access Control and Intrusion Detection for additional information.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1043

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-2

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electronic safety and security systems for proposed project.

B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.

C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installing, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Contents of Division 26, Electrical apply to this Section.

D. Comply with related products/systems requirements for Internet Protocol Communication devices located in Division 27:

1. Section 27 15 00, Communications Horizontal Cabling.

1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and those listed in this Section.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1044

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-3
B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

4. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers

5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

6. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

7. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

8. ASTM - ASTM International

9. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

10. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

11. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

12. FM - FM Global

13. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

14. NEC - National Electric Code

15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

16. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

17. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

18. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

19. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional references.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.

Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1045

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-4
E. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

F. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what difference, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings.

1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.

Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.

2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.

3. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

G. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.

H. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.

I. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

J. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security submittals.

K. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

L. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:

1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.

2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor are required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1046

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-5
additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

3. Where manufacturer equipment or model numbers are indicated with no exceptions, substitutions will be rejected.

M. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.

2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

N. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

O. Resubmission Requirements:

1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required by Architect/Engineer review comments. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment.

Cloud changes in the submittals.

2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken or "make corrections noted."

3. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.

P. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:

1. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Specification Sections for additional requirements for operations and maintenance manuals.

2. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment.
c. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
d. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include copy of start-up and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include commissioning reports.
h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1047

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-6
i. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.

Arrange for additional reviews; Bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

3. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."

4. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

Q. Record Drawings:

1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions.

Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements and location of concealed items. Include items changed by addenda, field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

2. Record Drawings are to include equipment locations, calculations, and schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.

3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on Revit Model and make one set of black-line drawings created from Revit Model in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit Revit Model and drawings upon substantial completion.

4. See Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (e.g. cable tray, panels, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1048

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-7

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.

Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Drawings in Revit Model. Revit Model release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate fittings, hangers, access panels, and elevation of bottom of cable tray above finished floor.

4. Drawings to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings and architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork.

5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.

6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.

D. Verify in field exact size, location, and clearances of existing material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related thereto.

E. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacturer, including but not limited to panels, devices and equipment unless otherwise specified in individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1049

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-8

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., devices, equipment, electrical boxes, panels, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect and Engineer prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Earthwork:

1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.

Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

E. Firestopping:

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1050

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-9

2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around conduit, raceway and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, and individual Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Earthquake resistant designs for Electronic Safety and Security (Division 28) equipment to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

C. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of safety and security equipment during earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Notify Architect and Engineer, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Prior to covering walls when electrical, safety and security systems installation is started.

2. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

3. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:

1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1051

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-10
Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, repair, refinish and leave in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

3.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with the individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect devices, panels and similar items until in service.

4. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified factory certified instructor at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1052

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-11

3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28 Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

3.9 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 00, Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to building structure. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports required for installation of equipment, conduit and wiring.

3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e. hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. In electrical and mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.

3.11 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:

1. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:
a. Cleaning
b. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
c. Training of Operating Personnel
d. Record Drawings
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1053

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY BASIC
REQUIREMENTS 28 00 00-12
e. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates
f. Start-up/Test Documents and Commissioning Reports

3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security Sections and the following:

1. Tests:
a. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Closeout Documents. b. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.

3.13 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement in the letter that electronic safety and security systems were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.

Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in operating and maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1054

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-1
SECTION 28 00 01

ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1DESIGN-BUILD SUMMARY
A. Work included in 28 00 01 applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits and incidentals to make electronic safety systems ready for Owner's use for proposed project.

1.2 DESIGN-BUILD INSTRUCTIONS
A. This document is issued to give Bidders a basis for preparing a proposal to design and install a complete Electronic Safety system for this project.

B. Alternates to this Document may be offered as a separate proposal.

1.3 DESIGN-BUILD APPROACH
A. Use this Specification for design/engineering requirements, workmanship and materials or construction. Utilize design-build concept throughout construction phase of project.

B. Investigate and be apprised of applicable codes, rules, and regulations as enforced by AHJ.

C. Visit the Site of the proposed construction. Verify and inspect the existing site to determine conditions that affect this work.

1.4 DESIGN-BUILD CRITERIA
A. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety Specifications. Requirements of Section are a minimum for Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections, unless otherwise stated in each Section, in which case that Section's requirements take precedence.

B. Reference Basis of Design narrative document.

C. Fire Alarm Design Criteria: Refer to Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm, for fire alarm system design criteria.

D. Fire Alarm Equipment: Refer to Section 28 31 00, Fire Detection and Alarm, for fire alarm equipment requirements.

1.5 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work included in 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements applies to Division 28, Electronic Safety work to provide materials, labor, tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's use of electronic safety systems for proposed project.

B. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of work.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1055

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-2
C. Definitions:

1. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

2. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly and installation.

3. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installing, applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as required to complete items of work furnished.

4. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by the Contractor as "equivalent," substitution requests must be submitted to Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, and approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

5. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's Authorized Representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain systems acceptance.

1.6 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Section apply to Division 28, Electronic Safety Contract Documents.

B. Related Work:

1. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:
a. Specifications including Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.
b. Drawings
c. Addenda
d. Owner/Architect Agreement
e. Owner/Contractor Agreement
f. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits
C. Contents of Division 26, Electrical apply to this Section.

1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and those listed in this Section.

B. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments, supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, of/from:

1. State of California:
a. CBC - California Building Code
b. CEC - California Electrical Code
c. CEC T24 - California Energy Code Title 24
d. CFC - California Fire Code
e. CMC - California Mechanical Code
f. CPC - California Plumbing Code
g. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
C. Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the latest adopted editions from:

1. ABA - Architectural Barriers Act

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1056

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-3

3. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

4. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers

5. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers

6. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

7. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

8. ASTM - ASTM International

9. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations

10. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency

11. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

12. FM - FM Global

13. ISO - International Organization for Standardization

14. NEC - National Electric Code

15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

16. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

17. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration

18. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association

19. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional references.

1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 01, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures.

B. Provide drawings in format and software release equal to the design documents. Drawings to be the same sheet size and scale as the Contract Documents.

C. "No Exception Taken" constitutes that review is for general conformance with the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given. Any action is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and quantity and will confirm and correlate at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of the work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.

D. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only. Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format, provide one file per division containing one bookmarked PDF file with each bookmark corresponding to each Specification Section.

Arrange bookmarks in ascending order of Specification Section number. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all transmissions/submissions.

E. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

F. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what difference, if any, exist between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for providing equipment and materials that meet the specifications and drawings.

1. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract Documents.

Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.

2. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for products, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided. Reference individual Division 28, October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1057

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-4
Electronic Safety specification Sections for specific items required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.

3. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these requirements.

G. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; bear costs of additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to contractor without review.

H. Resubmission Requirements: Make corrections or changes in submittals as required, and in consideration of Engineer’s comments. Identify Engineer’s comments and provide an individual response to each of the Engineer’s comments. Cloud changes in the submittals and further identify changes which are in response to Engineer’s comments.

I. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet ASCE 7-16 requirements for non-structural components. Provide engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Equipment Importance Factor as specified in Division 01 and in Structural documents.

J. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics, device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 28, Electronic Safety Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of approved submittal for inclusion in Division 26, Electrical and Division 28, Electronic Safety submittals.

K. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to start of construction or ordering of equipment.

L. Substitutions and Variation from Basis of Design:

1. The Basis of Design designated product establishes the qualities and characteristics for the evaluation of any comparable products by other listed acceptable manufacturers if included in this Specification or included in an approved Substitution Request as judged by the Design Professional.

2. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown. If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor are required for the rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base Bid, including resulting charges for work performed under other Divisions, will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of "Submittals." For any product marked "or approved equivalent," a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

3. Where manufacturer equipment or model numbers are indicated with no exceptions, substitutions will be rejected.

M. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical characteristics of all systems, device layout plans, and control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety specification Sections for additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements.

2. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1058

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-5
N. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual Sections.

O. Resubmission Requirements:

1. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required by Architect/Engineer review comments. Provide submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment.

Cloud changes in the submittals.

2. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exception taken or "make corrections noted."

3. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each change.

P. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owner's Instructions:

1. Reference individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Specification Sections for additional requirements for operations and maintenance manuals.

2. Submit, at one time, electronic files (PDF format) of manufacturer's operation and maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring servicing. Submit data when work is substantially complete and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts and service for each piece of equipment.
a. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not specific to this project.
b. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes and quantities relevant to each piece of equipment.
c. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available exploded views of assemblies and sub-assemblies.
d. Include Warranty per Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Sections.
e. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees. f. Include copy of start-up and test reports specific to each piece of equipment. g. Include commissioning reports.
h. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. i. Engineer will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.

Arrange for additional reviews; Bear costs for additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

3. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems. Where noted in individual Sections, training will include classroom instruction with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements Article titled "Demonstration."

4. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

Q. Record Drawings:

1. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “as-constructed” conditions.

Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing revision document, and include buried elements and location of concealed items. Include items changed by addenda, field orders, supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1059

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-6

2. Record Drawings are to include equipment locations, calculations, and schedules that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.

3. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD Files and drawings upon substantial completion.

4. See Division 28, Electronic Safety individual Sections for additional items to include in Record Drawings.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local, State and Federal codes, and other applicable laws and regulations. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

B. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes, higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

C. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis of Design manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual dimensions of systems (e.g. cable tray, panels, etc.) and equipment proposed to assure that systems and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis of Design, including, but not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing systems.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in writing, before starting work.

E. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

F. Provide products that are UL listed.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 01, General Requirements and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

1.11 COORDINATION DOCUMENTS
A. Prior to construction, prepare and submit coordinated layout drawings (composite drawings), to coordinate installation and location of ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, fire sprinklers, plumbing, lights, and electrical services. Composite Drawings show services on single sheet.

Key Drawings to structural column identification system. Prior to completion of Drawings, October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1060

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-7
coordinate proposed installation with architectural and structural requirements, and other trades (including plumbing, HVAC, fire protection, electrical, ceiling suspension, and ceiling tile systems, etc.), and provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not routed within the zone of influence.

B. Prepare Drawings as follows:

1. Drawings in CAD Format. CAD format release equal to design documents. Drawings to be same sheet size and scale as Contract Drawings and indicate location, size and elevation above finished floor of equipment and distribution systems.

2. Review and revise, as necessary, section cuts in Contract Drawings after verification of field conditions.

3. Indicate fittings, hangers, access panels, and elevation of bottom of cable tray above finished floor.

4. Drawings to indicate proposed ceiling grid and lighting layout as shown on electrical drawings and architectural reflected ceiling drawings and HVAC equipment, ductwork.

5. Incorporate Addenda items and change orders.

6. Provide additional coordination as requested by other trades.

C. Advise Architect in event conflict occurs in location or connection of equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or failure to advise Architect of conflict.

D. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at completion of project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one manufacture, including but not limited to panels, devices and equipment unless otherwise specified in individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

2.2 STANDARDS OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's printed catalog data and are to be UL, ETL, or FM listed and labeled or be approved by State, County, and City authorities prior to procurement and installation.

B. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

C. Hazardous Materials:

1. Comply with local, State of California, and Federal regulations relating to hazardous materials.

2. Comply with Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

3. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate contract.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1061

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-8
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., devices, equipment, electrical boxes, panels, etc.) so that they may be serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.

C. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions.

Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

D. Earthwork:

1. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents.

2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:
a. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork divisions.

Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.
b. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls. c. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

E. Firestopping:

1. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 07, Thermal and Moisture Protection.

2. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around conduit, raceway and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in plenums.

3.2 SEISMIC CONTROL
A. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 01, General Requirements, Structural documents, and individual Division 28 Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Earthquake resistant designs for Electronic Safety (Division 28) systems and equipment to conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.

C. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are carried to frame of structure in such a October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1062

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-9
way that frame will not be deflected when apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction having authority.

D. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of safety equipment during earthquake.

3.3 REVIEW AND OBSERVATION
A. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that they may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

1. Underground conduit and wire installation prior to backfilling.

2. Prior to covering walls when electronic safety systems installation is started.

3. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

4. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection by AHJ.

C. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Confirm Cutting and Patching Requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:

1. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval. Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

2. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included under this Section will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

3. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling or cutting.

Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and through concrete and masonry with grout.

4. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition. Patch and repair specifically where existing items have been removed. This includes repairing and painting walls, ceilings, etc. where existing conduit and devices are removed as part of this project. Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, repair, refinish and leave in condition matching existing prior to commencement of work.

5. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.5 EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY
A. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1063

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-10

3.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with the individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:

1. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction dust.

2. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close conduit openings with caps or plugs.

Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of installation.

3. Protect devices, panels and similar items until in service.

4. Products and/or materials that become damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be replaced before installation.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment, test systems, demonstrate to Owner's Authorized Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Staff as specified in Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified factory certified instructor at time approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job site observations.

3.8 CLEANING
A. Confirm cleaning requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28 Sections.

B. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment, removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work, remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

3.9 INSTALLATION
A. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01, General Requirements, Section 28 00 01, Electronic Safety Basic Requirements and individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections.

B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to building structure. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1064

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-11
C. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Provide miscellaneous supports required for installation of equipment, conduit and wiring.

3.10 PAINTING
A. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 09, Finishes.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:

1. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e. hangers, hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black asphalt varnish for exterior or black enamel for interior, suitable for hot surfaces.

2. In electrical and mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

3. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

4. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

5. Conduit: Clean, primer coat and paint interior conduit exposed in finished areas with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces. Color selected by Architect.

3.11 DEMOLITION
A. Confirm requirements in Division 01, General Requirements and Division 02, Existing Conditions.

B. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and the following:

1. Scope:
a. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and adjustments to electronic safety system required to meet code, and accommodate installation of new work.
b. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.
c. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt operations, normal activities, building access, access to different areas. Owner will cooperate to best of their ability to assist in coordinated schedule, but will remain final authority as to time of work permitted.

2. Examination:
a. Determine exact location of existing utilities and equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused by failure to locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items with new material to match existing. b. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. c. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
1) Verify accuracy of information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish work.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1065

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-12
2) Verify location and number of electronic safety system devices, panels, etc. in field.
d. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3. Promptly notify Owner if systems are found which are not shown on Drawings.

4. Execution:
a. Remove existing electronic safety equipment, devices and associated wiring from walls, ceilings, floors, and other surfaces scheduled for remodeling, relocation, or demolition unless shown as retained or relocated on Drawings. b. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain electrical continuity of existing systems during construction. Remove or relocate electrical boxes, conduit, wiring and equipment as encountered in removed or remodeled areas in existing construction affected by this work.
c. Remove and restore wiring which serves usable existing outlets clear of construction or demolition.
d. If existing junction boxes will be made inaccessible, or if abandoned outlets serve as feed through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, provide new conduit and wire to bypass abandoned outlets. e. If existing conduits pass through partitions or ceiling which are being removed or remodeled, provide new conduit and wire to reroute clear of construction or demolition and maintain service to existing load.
f. Extend circuiting and devices in existing walls to be furred out. g. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
h. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
i. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
j. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
k. Remove abandoned wiring to leave site clean.
l. If existing electrical equipment contains PCBs (Polychlorinated Biphenyl), replace with new non-PCB equipment. Dispose of material containing PCBs as required by federal and local regulations.
m. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. n. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.

5. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service during construction.

Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. a. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. b. Notify local fire service.
c. Make notifications at least five working days in advance. d. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.12 ACCEPTANCE
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly in reference to following:

1. Cleaning

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

3. Training of Operating Personnel

4. Record Drawings
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1066

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ELECTRONIC SAFETY BASIC REQUIREMENTS 28 00 01-13

5. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates

6. Start-up/Test Documents and Commissioning Reports

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Confirm requirements in Division 00, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 28, Electronic Safety Sections and conduct the following tests:

1. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required tests. Document tests and include in Closeout Documents.

2. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide appropriate personnel with tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of installation can be performed.

3.14 LETTER OF CONFORMANCE
A. Provide Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties with a statement in letter that electronic safety systems were installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global approvals.

B. Include Letter of Conformance, copies of manufacturers' warranties and extended warranties in operating and maintenance manuals.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1067

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-1
SECTION 28 10 00

ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SCOPE OF WORK
A. The project includes the provision and installation of a fully functional Library Access Control System. Contractor is responsible for providing all hardware, components, cabling, and programming required for the installation of this system.

B. The intended function of the Library Access Control System is to allow for staffless entry into the new Maker Space on the 2nd floor. The system shall allow for Patrons to access the Maker Space through the use of a software-based schedule, maintained by the Owner, or by using their Library Card.

C. This project includes (1) Access Control Card Reader location, however, the approved system shall allow for expansion to many additional Card Reader locations and Library-focused services in the future.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work included:

1. Security Management System (SMS)

2. Access Control System Main Control Panel

3. Access Control System Door Control Panel

4. Card Reader

5. Access Control Cards

6. Request to Exit Device (REX)

7. Electric Latch or Strike (provided by others - see door hardware schedule)

8. Power Supply

9. Cable and Wire

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

1.4 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. Federal Information Processing Standard Publication 201-1, Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors. (FIPS 201-1)

2. Homeland Security Presidential Standard Directive 12: Policy for a Common Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors. (HSPD-12)

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1068

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-2

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Security Management System (SMS):

1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. Honeywell

4. AMAG

5. LenelS2

6. Or approved equivalent.

B. Access Control System Main Control Panel:

1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. Honeywell

4. AMAG

5. LenelS2

6. Or approved equivalent.

C. Access Control System Door Control Panel:

1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. Honeywell

4. AMAG

5. LenelS2

6. Or approved equivalent.

D. Card Reader:

1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. HID

4. Or approved equivalent.

E. Access Control Cards:

1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. HID

4. Or approved equivalent.

F. Request to Exit Device (REX):

1. Bosch

2. Or approved equivalent.

G. Electric Latch or Strike: Provided by others; see door hardware schedule.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1069

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-3
H. Power Supply:

1. 1. Bibliotheca

2. Lyngsoe

3. Altronix

4. Or approved equivalent.

I. Cable and Wire:

1. West Penn Wire

2. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS)
A. Furnish and install the Following:

1. An SMS that is capable of controlling and monitoring the access control system.

2. An SMS that is designed to control and/or interface with industry standard OEM equipment.

3. An SMS that uses modular architecture to allow easy integration of the following capabilities/equipment:
a. Access Control
b. Intrusion detection
c. Elevator control.
d. Time and attendance.
e. CCTV system integration.
f. Alarm receiver interface.
g. Badging capabilities.
h. Employee and visitor database.

4. Provide one server license and four client licenses.

5. All SMS software to reside within the controller and be through a standard web browser.

6. Up to 25 users to able to operate, monitor and control the entire system with a user ID and password.

7. Software will have the following:
a. User rights setup and password assignment.
b. Centralized access control and alarm transactions monitoring. c. Remote control functions for access control, arming/disarming of alarm points and on/off controls. d. Card database administration.
e. Report generation of transactions.

2.3 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MAIN CONTROL PANEL
A. Furnish and install the Following:

1. A main access control system control panel that has the overall system intelligence, any required additional input/output boards and the communications controllers required for remote monitoring and control.

2. An access control system main panel that is modular and can have optional systems and functionality added per project requirements.

3. Control Panel Requirements:
a. 32-bits CPU.
b. Minimum speed of 500MHZ.
c. Must support standard RS 232, Ethernet and remote dial in via modem. d. Minimum 512Mb of flash memory.
e. Minimum 512Mb of RAM.
f. Supports up to 64 channels for alarm monitoring and 64 channels of voltage free relays for alarm signaling.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1070

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-4
g. The TO consist of at least one CPU board, two card readers, controller board, one eight channel input and output board, AC line filter, regulated power supply unit with online battery charger. h. Control panel board to support four industry standard Wiegand compatible reader interface ports, provide digital input interfaces to door status sensors and form-C relay output interfaces to door strikes.

2.4 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DOOR CONTROL PANEL
A. The local door controller to consist of a scalable architecture, allowing the monitoring and control of single or multiple doors per controller.

B. Door controller to utilize on-board microprocessors and database storage to allow for off-network door control capabilities.

C. Door controller to be connected and managed through Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 or wireless communications.

D. Door controller is to match the brand manufacturer of the main access control panel and operate in conjunction with that system.

2.5 CARD READER
A. Furnish and install card readers at locations indicated on the Drawings. Mounting height to be 48-inches unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Furnish and install a single gang size, wall mount proximity card reader or mullion mount card reader on store front applications.

C. Card Readers to be suitable for indoor or outdoor use.

D. Card Readers to be ADA compliant.

2.6 ACCESS CONTROL CARDS
A. 13.56 MHz Proximity Cards.

2.7 REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICE (REX)
A. Furnish and install a REX at each door indicated on the Drawings.

B. Coordinate with the door hardware schedule for type of device required.

C. If the REX is not built into the door hardware, install a surface mount passive infrared sensor (PIR) type device per architect's direction.

2.8 ELECTRIC LATCH OR STRIKE
A. Provided by others; see door hardware schedule.

2.9 POWER SUPPLY
A. Furnish and install power supplies for the access control panels, intrusions panels and other system devices that has an integral battery for backup.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1071

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION 28 10 00-5
B. Power supply converts 115VAC/60Hz input into eight independently controlled 12VDC or 24VDC fail safe and/or fail secure outputs with a total of 6 amp continuous supply current. Power supply has built in charger for backup batteries.

C. Back up battery is 12V, 0.7 amp rechargeable, sealed and maintenance free with a two hour run time.

D. Size power supply(s) so there is 20 percent spare capacity for future devices.

E. Install in a UL listed enclosure.

2.10 CABLE AND WIRE
A. Copper:

1. Power: 18 AWG, 2 pair, unshielded twisted pair.

2. RS-232: 18 AWG, 4 conductor, shielded.

3. Category 6A cabling to match that installed by the telecom contractor in Division 27, Communications.

4. Indicate all other wire required by manufacturer installation instructions on submittal Drawings and diagrams.

5. All cabling to be plenum rated where required.

B. Connectors:

1. Modular connector.

2. 24 V Power: Screw-down on spade lug.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1072

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-1
SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1SUMMARY
A. Work Included:

1. Photoelectric Type Detectors

2. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors

3. Combination Horn/Strobes

4. Strobes

5. Weatherproof/Surface Backboxes

6. Circuit Conductors
B. Scope: Provide modification and extension of the existing Notifier fire alarm system to accommodate remodel.

C. In addition, provide design for the following as required in these Contract Documents: Fire Alarm System.

D. In addition, remove existing fire alarm system in remodel areas.

E. System Design:

1. Design Criteria:
a. These are Contractor designed systems. Contact AHJ prior to bid to verify systems' requirements. Design systems in compliance with code as interpreted by the AHJ.
b. Fire Alarm Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.
c. Supervisory Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.
d. Trouble Sequence of Operation: Match Existing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contents of Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements apply to this Section.

B. Division 26, Electrical requirements apply to this section.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. References and Standards as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet the following:

1. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code, adopted edition.

2. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, adopted edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1073

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-2

1. Submit shop drawings which include documentation required per NFPA 72; Shop Drawings.

2. In addition, provide the following:
a. Provide system designer NICET certification number or Engineer's signature and seal on shop drawings.
b. Identification of system designer and evidence of qualification or certification of designer as required by AHJ.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Provide manuals containing the documentation required in NFPA 72; Completion Documentation.

2. In addition, provide the following:
a. One year warranty agreement including parts and labor. Warranty period begins upon date of substantial completion.
b. Instruction chart.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality assurance as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.

B. In addition, meet City of San Carlos, California requirements, ordinances and amendments.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Division 28, Electronic Safety and Division 01, General Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Photoelectric Type Detectors:

1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.

2. No substitutions permitted.

B. Duct-Mounted Smoke Detectors:

1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.

2. No substitutions permitted.

C. Combination Horn/Strobes:

1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.

2. Wheelock

3. Or approved equivalent.

D. Strobes:

1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm control equipment.

2. Wheelock

3. Or approved equivalent.

E. Weatherproof/Surface Backboxes:

1. Same manufacturer as fire alarm detection devices or notification appliances.

2. Or approved equivalent.

F. Circuit Conductors:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1074

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-3

1. Allied Wire and Cable

2. Belden

3. CCI

4. West Penn Wire

5. Or approved equivalent.

G. Substitutions:

1. For other acceptable manufacturers of specified control units, submit product data showing equivalent features and compliance with Contract Documents.

2. For substitution of products by manufacturers not listed, submit product data showing features and certification by Contractor that the design will comply with contract documents.

H. Equipment to be supplied by a certified manufacturer representative.

2.2 PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE DETECTORS
A. Provide flush mounted units where installed in finished areas; in unfinished areas, surface mounted units are acceptable, unless otherwise noted.

B. Panel adjustable sensitivity, LED source, multiple cell, 360 degree smoke entry, visual latching operation indicator, insect screen, functional test switch, two-wire operation and vandal-resistant locking feature.

2.3 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Photoelectric type. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct, visual indication of detector actuation, direct housing mount.

B. Detector powered from control panel, power on indicator light. Detector rated for air velocity, humidity and temperature of duct and environment where installed.

2.4 COMBINATION HORN/STROBES
A. Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount, insect-proof.

B. Provide horn/strobes that meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971.

Candela rating as required by NFPA 72.

C. Must be compatible with fire alarm control equipment and notification appliance circuit panels.

2.5 STROBES
A. Multi-candela, flush wall and ceiling mount, insect-proof.

B. Provide strobes that meet the latest requirements of NFPA 72, ANSI 117.1 and UL 1971.

Candela rating as required by NFPA 72.

C. Must be compatible with fire alarm control equipment and notification appliance circuit panels.

2.6 CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Copper or optical fiber; color code and label. Type FPL, FPLR and FPLP. Cable type as required by the NEC and the manufacturer.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1075

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-4
B. Minimum signaling line circuit and initiating device circuit wire size: AWG18.

C. Minimum notification appliance circuit wire size: AWG14, or as approved by Engineer.

D. Fiber optic cable as required by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide a complete and operable system compliant with all applicable codes and standards.

B. Obtain Architect's approval of locations of devices, appliances and annunciators before installation.

C. Circuits:

1. Signaling Line Circuits (SLC): Class B

2. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC): Class B.

D. Spare Capacity:

1. New Notification Appliance Circuits:
a. Minimum 25 percent spare current capacity.
b. Maximum 10 percent voltage drop.
c. Utilize UL maximum current draw value for notification appliances in calculations.

2. New Signaling Line Circuit: Minimum 25 percent spare device capacity.

E. Power Sources:

1. Primary: Dedicated branch circuits of facility power distribution system.

2. Secondary: Storage batteries.

3. Capacity: Sufficient to operate fire alarm system under normal supervisory condition for 24 hours and operate alarm signals for five minutes at end of standby period.

F. Obtain approval of system design from AHJ prior to installation. Do not begin installation without approval from AHJ and submittal review comments from Engineer.

G. Install in accordance with applicable codes, NFPA 72, NFPA 70 and the Contract Documents.

H. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, provide wiring, conduit and outlet boxes required for the erection of a complete system as described in these specifications, as shown on Drawings and as required by AHJ.

I. Conceal wiring, conduit, boxes and supports where installed in finished areas.

J. Provide raceway system for cabling concealed in walls and hard ceilings and in locations where cabling is exposed. Where exposed, provide surface raceway in finished areas and surface mounted EMT in non-finished areas.

K. Provide cabling and conduits system suitable for wet locations for below grade systems.

L. At junction boxes and termination points, provide identification tags on wires and cables.

M. Route wiring to avoid blocking access to equipment requiring service, access, or adjustment.

N. Existing Components:

1. Existing Fire Alarm System:

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1076

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-5
a. Maintain fully operational during construction in all areas except areas of remodel.

2. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. a. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. b. Notify local fire service.
c. Make notifications at least five working days in advance. d. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3. Provide fire watch in areas where the system is not functioning if required by the AHJ.

4. Equipment Removal:
a. Remove existing system after acceptance of new fire alarm system. Restore damaged surfaces.
b. Package operational fire alarm and detection equipment that has been removed and offer to Owner prior to disposal.
c. Remove from site and legally dispose of remainder of existing material.

5. On-Premises Supervising Station: Include, as part of this work, modifications necessary to existing supervising station to accommodate new fire alarm work.

O. Fire Safety Systems Interfaces:

1. Fire Safety Functions: Provide power and control conduit, wiring, boxes and terminations to power devices and interface to fire alarm system.
a. Doors:
1) Provide smoke detectors and addressable control relays to release magnetic hold open devices and roll-down fire doors and door locks. Verify requirements and quantities prior to bidding.
2) Smoke Barrier Door Magnetic Holders: Release upon activation of smoke detectors in smoke zone on either side of door.
3) Electronic Locks or Electromagnetic Door Locks on Egress Doors: Unlock smoke zone egress doors upon activation of any alarm initiating device or suppression system in smoke zone.
4) Overhead Coiling Fire Doors: Release upon activation of smoke detectors on either side of door.
b. HVAC Systems:
1) Fire/Smoke Dampers and Smoke Dampers:
(a) Provide required smoke detectors, relays, wiring and the like. (b) Connect control and power wiring to dampers per manufacturer's instructions.
(c) Verify quantities, location and requirements of dampers with Division 23, HVAC Drawings and Specifications and mechanical system installer.
2) Air Moving Systems:
(a) Provide duct-mounted smoke detector for air systems with air flow rates exceeding 2000 CFM. Coordinate with Division 23, HVAC. (b) Install duct-mounted smoke detector(s) on return side of air system. (c) Provide control wiring from addressable relay contacts to air handling equipment controller.
(d) Provide duct-mounted smoke detectors rated for air velocity, temperature and humidity of duct. Verify quantities, locations and requirements with Division 23, HVAC Drawings and mechanical system installer.
(e) Where duct-mounted smoke detectors are mounted in inaccessible building void spaces provide access hatch. Provide access hatch with fire rating equivalent to rating of wall, ceiling, or shaft being penetrated.

P. Inspection and Testing for Completion:

1. System testing and commissioning to be performed by a certified manufacturer representative.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1077

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-6

2. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NFPA 72 and requirements of local authorities; document each inspection and test.

3. Document audibility measurements and verify intelligibility for each space on record drawings.

4. Provide the services of the installer's supervisor or person with equivalent qualifications to supervise inspection and testing, correction and adjustments.

5. Provide tools, software and supplies required to accomplish inspection and testing.

6. Prepare for testing by ensuring that work is complete and correct; perform preliminary tests as required to test system.

7. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation and retest until entire system complies with Contract Documents.

8. Notify Owner seven days prior to beginning completion inspections and tests.

9. Notify authorities having jurisdiction and comply with their requirements for scheduling inspections and tests and for observation by their personnel.

10. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, operate system in normal mode for at least 14 days without any system or equipment malfunctions. a. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
b. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction. c. Replace devices with readings outside of allowed value at time of system check out.
d. Owner will provide attendant operator personnel during diagnostic period; schedule training to allow Owner personnel to perform normal duties. e. At end of successful diagnostic period, complete and submit NFPA 72 "Inspection and Testing Form."
Q. Closeout:

1. Closeout Demonstration:
a. Demonstrate proper operation of functions to Owner.
b. Be prepared to conduct any of the required tests.
c. Have at least one copy of operation and maintenance data, copy of project record drawings, input/output matrix and operator instruction chart(s) available during demonstration.
d. Have authorized technical representative of control unit manufacturer present during demonstration.
e. Demonstration may be combined with inspection and testing required by AHJ.

Notify AHJ in time to schedule demonstration.
f. Repeat demonstration until successful.

2. Substantial Completion of the project cannot be achieved until inspection and testing is successful and:
a. Specified diagnostic period without malfunction has been completed. b. Approved operating and maintenance data has been delivered. c. Spare parts, extra materials and tools have been delivered. d. All aspects of operation have been demonstrated to Architect. e. Final acceptance of the fire alarm system has been given by authorities having jurisdiction.
f. Occupancy permit has been granted.
g. Specified pre-closeout instruction is complete.

3.2 PHOTOELECTRIC TYPE DETECTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide machine printed address labels on addressable devices. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1078

WRNS Studio
Project No:

SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
San Carlos CA
February 12, 2025 Permit Set
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00-7
D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.

3.3 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide machine printed address labels on addressable devices. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.

3.4 COMBINATION HORN/STROBES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide machine printed labels on notification appliances with appliance circuit number and sequence. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.

D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.

3.5 STROBES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide machine printed labels on notification appliances with appliance circuit number and sequence. Labels to be visible from the floor without magnification.

D. Provide protective guard where device is subject to abuse and where required by AHJ.

3.6 WEATHERPROOF/SURFACE BACKBOXES
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide manufacturer's weatherproof backbox listed for use in areas where the device or appliance is subject to humidity in excess of listed rating. Provide manufacturer surface backboxes where devices cannot be installed recessed.

3.7 CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS
A. Reference 3.01, General Installation Requirements.

B. Install per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

C. Provide wiring to meet the requirements of national, state and local electrical codes. Provide color coded wiring as recommended and specified by the fire alarm and detection system manufacturer. Provide Type FPLR cable when in a riser application or FPLP cable when installed in plenums.

END OF SECTION
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1079

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-2

06 1600 Sheathing
06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 2100 Building Insulation
07 2715 Nonbituminous self-Adhering Air Barriers
07 5113 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing
07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
07 8413 Penetration Firestopping
07 9200 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS
08 1416 Flush Wood Doors
08 6250 Tubular Daylighting Devices
08 8000 Glazing
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 2900 Gypsum Board
09 3000 Tiling
09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories
09 6515 Resilient Flooring
09 8430 Sound Absorbing Panels
09 9123 Interior Painting
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces
10 4413 Fire Protection Cabinets
10 4416 Fire Extinguishers
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
(Not Used)
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 2413 Roller Window Shades
12 3600 Countertops
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
(Not Used)
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 0000 Fire Suppression Basic Requirements
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1080

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-3

21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 1300 Fire Suppression Sprinkler Systems
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0000 Plumbing Basic Requirements
22 0523 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 0529 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping an d Equipment 22 0553 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equi pment 22 0700 Plumbing Insulation
22 1000 Plumbing Piping
22 3000 Plumbing Equipment
22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIO NING 23 0000 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning ( HVAC) Basic Requirements 23 0519 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping
23 0523 General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping
23 0529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping, Ductw ork and Equipment 23 0548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Equ ipment 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping, Ductwork an d Equipment 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC
23 0700 HVAC Insulation
23 0900 Instrumentation and Control Performance Spe cifications 23 2113 HVAC Piping
23 2116 Hydronic Piping Specialties
23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings
23 3300 Air Duct Accessories
23 3400 HVAC Fans
23 3600 Air Terminal Units
23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
(Not Used)
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 0000 Electrical Basic Requirements
26 0519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System s
26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems and Equipment 26 0533 Raceways
26 0534 Boxes
26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 0810 Building Lighting Acceptance Testing and Do cumentation 26 0943 Digital Lighting Controls
26 2726 Wiring Devices
26 2816.16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1081

WRNS Studio SAN CARLOS LIBRARY
Project No: 23033.00 610 Elm St. San Carlos CA
October 27, 2025 Construction Documents

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0010-4

27 0000 Communications Basic Requirements
27 0528.28 Firestopping for Communications Systems
27 05 28 Pathways for Communications Systems
27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling
DISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 3100 Fire Detection and Alarm
28 0000 Electronic Safety and Security Basic Requir ements 28 0001 Electronic Safety Basic Requirements
28 1000 Access Control and Intrusion Detection
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
(Not Used)
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
(Not Used)
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
(Not Used)

END OF DOCUMENT

October 27, 2025
Construction Documents

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1082

5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
PROJECT NO.: DATEISSUES

MM/DD/YYYYISSUE NAME
AHJ #

MM/DD/YYYYISSUE NAME

MM/DD/YYYYISSUE NAME
REVISION LIST# DATE
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070

MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
23035.00
COVER
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
G-000

STRUCTURAL ONLY

PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE

FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE

CALIFORNIA BUILDING, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL,

ELECTRICAL, AND ENERGY CODES AS AMENDED
BY THE JURISDICTION.

PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF DOCUMENTS

DOES NOT AUTHORIZE CONSTRUCTION TO

PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF ANY FEDERAL,
STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.

BY: ___________________ DATE: _________________
WEST COAST CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. (WC3)
Donald Zhao
05/23/2025

JOB COPY

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1083

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
5/19/2025 2:16:22 PM
23035.00

DRAWING INDEX,

PROJECT DIRECTORY,

PROJECT INFO
G-001
05/19/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070

MAKERSPACE PERMIT

RESUBMISSION
05/19/2025

DRAWING SHEET INDEXPROJECT DIRECTORYPROJECT INFOAPPLICABLE CODES & AGENCIES

LOCATION MAPVICINITY MAP

ARCHITECT

MECHANICAL

WRNS STUDIO
501 SECOND STREET
SUITE 402
SAN FRANCISCO, CA 94107
415-489-2224

ELECTRICAL

STRUCTURAL

PLUMBING

MAR STRUCTURAL DESIGN
2332 FIFTH ST. SUITE D
BERKELEY, CA 94710
510-991-1101
INTERFACE ENGINEERING INC.
1999 HARRISON STREET, SUITE 550
OAKLAND, CA 94612
415-489-7240
INTERFACE ENGINEERING INC.
1999 HARRISON STREET, SUITE 550
OAKLAND, CA 94612
415-489-7240
INTERFACE ENGINEERING INC.
1999 HARRISON STREET, SUITE 550
OAKLAND, CA 94612
415-489-7240

THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS IS TO CONSTRUCT REFERENCED PROJECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 24. SHOULD ANY

CONDITION DEVELOP NOT COVERED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS WHEREIN THE FINISHED WORK WILL NOT COMPLY WITH SAID CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS TITLE 24, A CHANGE

ORDER DETAILING AND SPECIFYING THE REQUIRED WORK SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO AND APPROVED BY THE AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.

CALIFORNIA CODE OF REGULATIONS (CCR)
2022 CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE - PART 2, TITLE 24, CCR
(BASED UPON 2021 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE)
2022 CALIFORNIA ELECTRICAL CODE - PART 3, TITLE 24, CCR (BASED UPON 2020 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE)
2022 CALIFORNIA MECHANICAL CODE - PART 4, TITLE 24, CCR (BASED UPON 2021 UNIFORM MECHANICAL CODE )
2022 CALIFORNIA PLUMBING CODE - PART 5, TITLE 24, CCR
(BASED UPON 2021 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE)
2022 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE - PART 6, TITLE 24, CCR
2022 CALIFORNIA FIRE CODE - PART 9, TITLE 24, CCR
(BASED UPON 2021 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE)

PROJECT LOCATION
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CA 94070

PROJECT SUMMARY
PROJECT SCOPE TO INCLUDE THE INTERIOR RENOVATION OF APPROXIMATLY 1,000

SQFT OF TENANT SPACE ON THE SECOND FLOOR TO BE CONVERTED TO A MAKER SPACE FOR THE LIBRARY. SPACE WILL BE USED BY THE LIBRARY PATRONS FOR A RANGE OF ACTIVITIES RELATED TO MAKING AND CRAFT.
0' 100' 200' 1000' 0' 500' 1000' 2000'

PROJECT SITE PROJECT SITE

TECHNOLOGY
INTERFACE ENGINEERING INC.
1999 HARRISON STREET, SUITE 550
OAKLAND, CA 94612
415-489-7240
SHEET # SHEET NAME REV
00 GENERAL
G-000 COVER
G-001 DRAWING INDEX, PROJECT DIRECTORY, PROJECT INFO
G-003 GENERAL NOTES, ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND

ABBREVIATIONS
3 01 STRUCTURAL
S-001 STRUCTURAL NOTES, ROOF PLAN, DETAILS
1 02 ARCHITECTURAL
A-102 SECOND FLOOR PLAN, EQUIPMENT PLAN, FURNITURE PLAN,

DEMO PLAN
A-103 SECOND FLOOR RCP, ROOF PLAN
A-501 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-601 INTERIOR PARTITION SCHD AND DETAILS
A-602 ROOF AND CEILING DETAILS
A-651 STANDARD CASEWORK SCHEDULE, DETAILS
A-652 CASEWORK DETAILS
A-701 DOOR AND WINDOW SCHEDULE, DOOR AND WINDOW
DETAILS, TYP. MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND CLEARANCES
A-901 FINISH PLAN, FINISH SCHEDULE & DETAILS
A-902 RENDERINGS
10 03 MECHANICAL
M-001 SYMBOL LIST AND GENERAL NOTES - MECHANICAL
M-002 SCHEDULES - MECHANICAL
M-003 TITLE 24- MECHANICAL
M-004 TITLE 24- MECHANICAL
M-101 SECOND FLOOR PRE-BALENCE PLAN - MECHANICAL
M-201 SECOND FLOOR PLANS - MECHANICAL
M-202 ROOF PLAN - MECHANICAL
M-301 DIAGRAMS- MECHANICAL
M-401 DETAILS - MECHANICAL
9 04 PLUMBING
P-001 SYMBOL LIST AND GENERAL NOTES - PLUMBING
P-002 SCHEDULES - PLUMBING
P-201 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - PLUMBING
PD-201 SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN - PLUMBING
4 05 ELECTRICAL
E-001 SYMBOL LIST, GENERAL NOTES,LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE, AND

LIGHTING CONTROL MATRIX - ELECTRICAL
E-002 TITLE 24 - ELECTRICAL
E-101 OVERALL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL
E-201 ENLARGED SECOND FLOOR PLAN - LIGHTING
E-301 ENLARGED SECOND FLOOR PLAN - POWER
E-302 ROOF PLAN - POWER
E-401 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULES - ELECTRICAL
7 06_TECHNOLOGY
T-001 SYMBOL LIST AND GENERAL NOTES - TECHNOLOGY
T-201 OVERALL SECOND FLOOR PLAN - TECHNOLOGY
T-301 ENLAREGED SECOND FLOOR PLAN - TECHNOLOGY
3 1 PERMIT RESUBMISSION 05/19/2025

DEFERRED SUBMITTAL ENGINEER SHALL STAMP AND SIGN DRAWINGS AND CALCULATIONS TWO (2) COPIES OF REVIEWED SUBMITTALS, WITH ARCHITECT/ENGINEERS REVIEW STAMP

WILL BE FORWARDED TO THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOR APPROVAL LIST OF SUMBITTALS IS AS FOLLOWS:
-FIRE ALARM
-SPRINKLER

DEFERRED SUBMITTAL

1. 2.

3. BUILDING OCCUPANCY GROUP(S): A-3, B
TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: II-B
SPRINKLERS: YES
NUMBER OF STORIES: 2
OCCUPANT LOAD OF MAKER SPACE: 46
1 BUILDING INFO

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1084

1C
1D
1A
1B

HEIGHT / ELEVATION DATUM

INDICATES HEIGHT FROM GIVEN POINT

REVISION NUMBER

REVISION SYMBOL

CLOUD INDICATES AREA OF REVISION
2 DETAIL SYMBOL

DETAIL NUMBER

SHEET LOCATION

DETAIL REFERENCE

WALL / BUILDING SECTION

ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF CUT

ELEVATION/SECTION SYMBOL

INTERIOR ELEVATION

DETAIL SECTION
A-501
4 A-901

ROOM IDENTIFIER

ROOM NUMBER

ADD (E) IF ROOM IS EXISTING

GRID LINE

GRID SYMBOL

ROOM NAME

GRID DESIGNATION
A101
1 A101
1 SHEET NUMBER

DETAIL NUMBER

ROOM NAME
2508A

MATCHLINE
DRAWING / SHEET REFERENCE FOR SECTOR PLAN1 / A-101
A101
1 LEVEL 1
0'-0"
A101
1 DETAIL NUMBER

SHEET LOCATION
ALIGN

ALIGN SYMBOL
A
1 KEYNOTE

AESS TRELLIS, SSD
05 70 00.01

DESCRIPTION OF ELEMENT

SPEC SECTION WHERE INFO RELATED TO THIS

ELEMENT CAN BE FOUND

NUMBERS AFTER THE DECIMAL ARE SEQUENTIAL AND

NOT RELATED TO SUB-SECTIONS WITHIN THE SPEC

MATERIAL TAG
GL-07A SYMBOL FOR SCHEDULED MATERIAL,

SEE FINISH SCHEDULE

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
1 : 1
3/27/2025 12:58:41 PM
23035.00

GENERAL NOTES,

ARCHITECTURAL

SYMBOLS AND

ABBREVIATIONS
G-003
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET 03/28/2025

GENERAL NOTESARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLSARCHITECTURAL ABBREVIATIONS

ABV ABOVE

ACC ADA ACCESSIBLE

ACOUS ACOUSTICAL

ACP ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL

ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE

ADDL ADDITIONAL

ADDL ADJUSTABLE

AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR

ALT ALTERNATE

ANC ANCHOR

APPROX APPROXIMATE

ARCH ARCHITECT / ARCHITECTURAL

AUTO AUTOMATIC

BD BOARD

BKG BACKING

BLDG BUILDING

BLKG BLOCKING

BOTT BOTTOM

BRKT BRACKET

BTWN BETWEEN

CFCI CONTRACTOR FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

CFOI CONTRACTOR FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED

CG CORNER GUARD

CH CHANNEL

CJ CONTROL JOINT

CL CENTERLINE

CLG CEILING

CLO CLOSET

CLR CLEAR

COL COLUMN

COMM COMMUNICATION /S

CONC CONCRETE

CONN CONNECTION

CONSTR CONSTRUCTION

CONT CONTINUOUS

CONTR CONTRACTOR

COORD COORDINATE

CORR CORRIDOR

CPT CARPET

CSWK CASEWORK

CTR CENTER / COUNTER

CTSK COUNTERSUNK

DBL DOUBLE

DEMO DEMOLISH / DEMOLITION

DEPT DEPARTMENT

DIA DIAMETER

DIAG DIAGONAL

DIM /S DIMENSION /S

DN DOWN

DO DOOR OPENING

DR DOOR

DSA DIVISION OF STATE ARCHITECT

DTL DETAIL

DWG /S DRAWING /S
(E) EXISTING
E EAST

EA EACH

EAS EACH SIDE

EAW EACH WAY

EF EACH FACE

ELEC ELECTRICAL

EMERG EMERGENCY

ENCL ENCLOSURE

ENGR ENGINEER

EP ELECTRICAL PANEL

EQ EQUAL

EQUIP EQUIPMENT

EXT EXTERIOR

FA FIRE ALARM

FACP FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

FDC FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION

FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET

FF FINISH FLOOR

FG FINISH GRADE

FIN FINISH

FL FLOOR

FO FACE OF

FOF FACE OF FINISH

FOG FACE OF GLASS

FOS FACE OF STUD

FP FIREPROOF /ING

FR FIRE RATED

FSD FIRE SMOKE DAMPER

FSL FIRE SPRINKLER

FSR FIRE SPRINKLER RISER

FT FOOT / FEET

FTG FOOTING

FURR FURRING

FWP FABRIC WRAPPED PANEL

GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR

GEN GENERATOR

GL GLASS / GLAZING

GND GROUND

GR GRADE

GRD GUARD

GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD

GYP GYPSUM

HAT CH HAT CHANNEL

HC HOLLOW CORE

HDWR HARDWARE

HM HOLLOW METAL

HORIZ HORIZONTAL

HP HIGH POINT

HR HOUR

HSS HOLLOW STRUCTURAL SECTION

HT HEIGHT

IN INCH

INCL INCLUDE /ING

INT INTERIOR

INTER INTERMEDIATE

JT JOINT

LOC LOCATION

LP LOW POINT

LW LIGHT WEIGHT

MAT MATERIAL

MAX MAXIMUM

MECH MECHANICAL

MFR MANUFACTURER

MIN MINIMUM / MINUTE

MISC MISCELLANEOUS

MTD MOUNTED

MTG MOUNTING

MTL METAL
(N) NEW

N NORTH

NIC NOT IN CONTRACT

NO NUMBER

NOM NOMINAL

NR NON-RATED

NTS NOT TO SCALE

O/ OVER

O/H OVERHEAD

OA OVERALL

OC ON CENTER

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. 12.

13. 14.

15. 16.

17. 18.

19. 20.

THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT IS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF A COMPLETE AND FULLY FUNCTIONING INSTALLATION. THESE DOCUMENTS DESCRIBE THE DESIGN INTENT AND SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF THE INSTALLATION. THESE DOCUMENTS DO NOT INTEND TO SHOW EVERY ITEM REQUIRED TO CONSTRUCT THE WORK. ITEMS SUCH AS FASTENERS CONNECTORS,

FILLERS, MISCELLANEOUS CLOSURE ELEMENTS, ANCILLARY CONTROL WIRING AND POWER

WHERE REQUIRED FOR THE CONTROL OR OPERATION FO THE PROVIDED EQUIPMENT ARE NOT ALWAYS SHOWN BUT ARE CONSIDERED INCLUDED IN THE SCOPE OF THE WORK. IT IS THE

RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE A FULLY FUNCTIONING INSTALLATION

WHICH MEETS THE DESIGN INTENT, INCLUDING THE SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED IN THESE DOCUMENTS.

ALL WORK SHOWN, NOTED OR DETAILED IS NEW, EXCEPT WHERE INDICATED AS EXISTING OR AS EXISTING TO REMAIN.

THESE DOCUMENTS DESCRIBE A SINGLE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT. THE USE OF SUBCONTRACTORS IS THE ELECTION OF THE CONTRACTOR. THESE DOCUMENTS DO NOT INTEND TO DIVIDE THE WORK AMONG THE CONTRACTOR'S SUBCONTRACTORS. WHERE THE DOCUMENTS DO IDENTIFY WORK WHICH IS "NOT IN MECHANICAL WORK" OR "NOT IN ELECTRICAL WORK" IT MEANS THAT THE WORK IS NOT FURTHER DESCRIBED OR SPECIFIED IN THE MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS. IT DOES NOT PRECLUDE THE CONTRACTOR FROM DELEGATING THE WORK TO THE ENTITIES OF HIS ELECTION. IN ADDITION

THE DIVISION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS INTO ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL

MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND OTHER DESIGN DISCIPLINES NEITHER DIVIDES THE WORK

BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR'S SUBCONTRACTOR NOR IMPLIES THAT ALL OF THE WORK FOR THOSE DISCIPLINES IS SHOWN ONLY IN THOSE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS.

CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AT THE SITE

AND SHALL REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES IN WRITING TO THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER BY THE

MEANS OF AN REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI) OR AS PART OF THE APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS OR SUBMITTALS.

SPECIFIC ITEMS NOTED TO BE VERIFIED OR FIELD VERIFIED ARE REQUIRED TO BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO ORDERING MATERIALS OR PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK.

CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL INCIDENTAL WORK NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, THE REMOVAL AND/OR

REINSTALLATION OF ALL EXISTING ITEMS, OF PORTIONS OF THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHETHER SHOWN OR NOT.

THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO HAVE EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF PROCEDURES IN PLACE PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ALL

SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH ALL SHUT-OFF VALVE LOCATIONS ON THE SITE AND HAVE PROPER TOOLS READILY AVAILABLE TO OPERATE VALVES.

IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE SUBCONTRACTORS TO REVIEW ALL DRAWINGS, PROJECT MANUAL, ADDENDA, ETC. IN ORDER TO ASSURE THE COORDINATION OF ALL WORK AFFECTING EACH TRADE. FAILURE TO REVIEW AND COORDINATE

ALL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR WITH ALL THE SUBCONTRACTORS

FOR APPLICABLE ITEMS OF THE WORK SHALL NOT RELIEVE THE RESPONSIBLE PARTY FROM PERFORMING ALL WORK SO REQUIRED AS PART OF THE CONTRACT.

THE PROJECT MANUAL, WHICH INCLUDES THE GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL

CONDITIONS, AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, AND THE DRAWINGS ARE COMPLIMENTARY AND TOGETHER DESCRIBE THE PROJECT REQUIREMENTS. WHERE THERE ARE DISCREPANCIES

BETWEEN THE PROJECT MANUAL AND THE DRAWINGS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADVISE THE ARCHITECT AND REQUEST A CLARIFICATION. THE ORDER OF PRECEDENCE BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND THE PROJECT MANUAL IS AS DEFINED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LAYOUT AND SEQUENCE THE INSTALLATION OF THE WORK SO THAT THE DIFFERENT SYSTEMS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE INSTALLATION OF SUCCESSIVE WORK. IN

GENERAL, SYSTEMS INSTALLED FIRST SHOULD BE KEPT AS HIGH AND TIGHT TO STRUCTURE AS POSSIBLE SO AS TO LEAVE SPACE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS WHICH FOLLOW.

REFER TO THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR GENERAL INFORMATION, PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF THE WORK AND ARE INCLUDED AS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION FOR EACH ITEM SPECIFIED. IF

DISCREPANCIES EXISTING BETWEEN THE SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS, THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS SHALL PREVAIL. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES OF ANY DISCREPANCIES.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING THE COORDINATION OF NEW WORK OR EXISTING CONDITIONS

MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IN WRITING PRIOR TO THE BID SUBMISSION AND WITH ADEQUATE TIME FOR RESPONSE TO ALL BIDDERS. THE OWNER'S

REPRESENTATIVE WILL RESPOND TO QUESTIONS, SUBMITTED IN A TIMELY MANNER, WITH WRITTEN CLARIFICATIONS FORWARDED TO ALL BIDDERS.

THE EXISTING DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS ARE ASSUMED TO BE ACCURATE BASED ON AVAILABLE INFORMATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL, PRIOR TO THE

START OF CONSTRUCTION, VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS, PROVIDE A COMPLETE FIELD

LAYOUT ON THE JOB SITE, AND NOTIFY IN WRITING (RFI) TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE,

CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, AND ARCHITECT OF ANY DEVIATIONS OR CONFLICTS WITH THESE DRAWINGS.

GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROTECTING WORK AREAS AND MATERIALS FROM THEFT, VANDALISM, AND OTHER LOSSES. ALL CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES SHALL BE CONTAINED WITHIN FENCED OR BARRICADED AREAS PER THE GENERAL CONDITIONS.

THE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO THE DIMENSIONS INDICATED OR THE ACTUAL SIZES OF CONSTRUCTION ITEMS. WHERE NO DIMENSION OR

METHOD OF DETERMINING A LOCATION IS GIVEN, VERIFY CORRECT DIMENSION OR LOCATION WITH THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

THE DRAWINGS AND REFERENCED DETAILS HAVE BEEN DIMENSIONED IN ORDER TO ESTABLISH THE CONTROL AND GUIDELINES FOR FIELD LAYOUT. WHERE DISCREPANCY EXISTS BETWEEN

THE DRAWING AND THE DETAIL THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FINISH OR CENTERLINE OF WALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

WHERE DIMENSIONS ARE NOTED TO BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD (V.I.F.) THE DIMENSION SHOWN IS THE DESIGN BASIS, BUT MAY DIFFER FROM ACTUAL CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY

THESE DIMENSIONS WHILE LAYING OUT THE WORK AND REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES

BETWEEN THE DESIGN BASIS AND ACTUAL DIMENSIONS TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. WHERE DIMENSIONS ARE NOTED "±", FIELD DIMENSIONS MAY VARY FROM THE NOTED DIMENSIONS BY MINOR AMOUNTS.

INTERIOR DETAILS ARE KEYED TO THE PLANS AT TYPICAL LOCATIONS. TYPICAL DETAILS APPLY TO ALL LOCATIONS WHICH ARE SIMILAR BUT ARE NOT OTHERWISE DETAILED. THE CONTRACTOR

AND SUBCONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE TO COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF ALL TYPICAL DETAILS AND INSTALL THE WORK INDICATED. IF DISCREPANCIES EXIST OR QUALIFICATION IS

REQUIRED, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO PROCEEDING.

ABBREVIATIONS ON THIS SHEET APPLY TO THE ENTIRE SET UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.

OD OUTSIDE DIAMETER / DIMENSION

OFCI OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED

OFD OVERFLOW DRAIN

OFF OFFICE

OFOI OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED

OH OPPOSITE HAND

OPNG OPENING

OPP OPPOSITE

PENN PENETRATION

PERF PERFORATED

PERIM PERIMETER

PLAS PLASTER

PNL PANEL

PR PAIR

PREFAB PREFABRICATED

PROJ PROJECTION

QTY QUANTITY

REF REFERENCE

REFL REFLECTED

REQ REQUIRED

RESIL RESILIENT

REV REVISION

RM ROOM

S SOUTH

SCHD SCHEDULED

SECT SECTION

SED SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

SF SQUARE FOOT / FEET

SHT SHEET

SIM SIMILAR

SPAC SPACING

SPEC /S SPECIFICATION /S

SSD SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS

STD STANDARD

STIFF STIFFENER

SUSP SUSPENDED

SY SQUARE YARD

SYM SYMMETRICAL

SYS SYSTEM

T&B TOP AND BOTTOM

THK THICK

TO TOP OF

TYP TYPICAL / TYPICAL UON

UON UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED

VERT VERTICAL

VEST VESTIBULE

VIF VERIFY IN FIELD

W WEST / WIDTH

W/ WITH

W/O WITHOUT

WDW WINDOW

WK WORK

WO WHERE OCCURS

WPT WORKING POINT

WT WEIGHT
E:
03/28/2025
02/04/2024
03/18/2025
E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1085

(1/3 DISTANCE =5'-11")
17'-8"
41'-6"

SHEET NOTES

1. 2.

3. 4.

SEE SHEET G-100, FOR OVERALL FIRE LIFE
SAFETY CODE INFORMATION.

FIRE SPRINKLERS NOT REQ. PER EXCEPTION 3

OF THE CONFERENCE ROOM POD

INTEPRETATION DEVELOPED BY BELLVUE
WASHINGTON FIRE DEPARTMENT.

WHERE THE BOOTH HAS AN APPLICABLE

TESTING REPORT ACCOMPANIED BY FULL-

SCALE FIRE TESTING REPORT SHOWING THE

CEILING SPRINKLERS CONTROL A FIRE

ORIGINATING FROM INSIDE THE BOOTH, AS

ALLOWED BY ICC-ES ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
519 SECTION 6.8.D
TESTING REPORT PROVIDED.

TYPICAL FLOOR ANCHORING DRAWINGS AND
CALCULATIONS PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER.

SEE DETAILS A-900.2
LEGEND

ROOM NAME

FIRE EXTIGUISHER

CABINET

EXIT SIGN
EXIT

OCCUPANT LOAD AT EXIT

OR EXIT DISCHARGE

ROOM NUMBER

ROOM OCCUPANT LOAD

DOOR MARK
"X" INDICATES

PANIC HARDWARE

INDICATES FIRE RATING
(MINUTES)

DIRECTION OF TRAVEL

REMOTE POINT ON FLOOR

AGGREGATE OCCUPANT

LOAD ALONG PATH

EGRESS PATH OF TRAVEL

ROOM NAME
101
13 2548
X
45 34
41 FEC
1 HR FIRE RATED PARTITION

SPACE DIAGONAL

MEASUREMENT
1/3 OF DIAGONAL

MEASUREMENT
(E) ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS
(E) SKYLIGHT @ ROTUNDA

CHESNUT STREET

ELM STREET

CHERRY STREET
(E) SECOND FLOOR EXT. WALL

APARTMENT BUILDING

CITY HALL

OPEN TO BELOW

OPEN TO BELOW

RAMP DOWN

RAMP DOWN
(E) PARKING LOT
(E) ACCESSIBLE

ROUTE FROM

PARKING
(E) PARKING

SPACES &

ACCESS STALLS
C.9
D
D.8
E
5 6 7 8
912 SF
20 46
MAKERS
SPACE
132
E
45 SCOPE UNDER SEPERATE PERMIT
FE
NOTE: CITY AGREED TO

RELOCATE (E) FE TO

THIS WALL LOCATION

POLE MTD POLE MTD
22" MIN.
17" MIN.
60" MIN.

TO GROUND
60" MIN.

TO GROUND

BLUE FIELD

WHITE EMBLEM

WHITE TEXT

AREA OF SIGN TO
BE MIN. 70 SQ FT

REFLECTORIZED
SIGN

CONSTRUCTED OF

PORCELAIN STEEL

W/ BEADED TEXT

OR EQUAL
NOTE: ALL ACCESSIBLE

SIGNS SHALL MEET THE

REQUIREMENTS OF

THE ADA AND
CALIFORNIA TITLE 2024

LETTERING SHALL

NOT BE LESS THAN
1" IN HEIGHT
19'-0" MIN.
14'-0"
MIN.
5'-0"
MIN.
9'-0"
2'-0"
(E) 4'-0" WHEEL STOP
ACC. ROUTE NOT
EXCEED 1:50 (2%)

CROSS SLOPE
(E) 3'X3' SYMBOL,

WHEELCHAIR

W/OCCUPANT IN WHITE

ON BLUE BACKGROUND
HANDICAP SIGN MIN. 70
SQ. IN ON POLE FACING
PATH OF TRAVEL W/80"

OF HEAD BELOW SIGN,
SEE 4/G-201.0
(E) CURB
DIAGONAL STRIPES @ 36"
OC
(E) ACCESSIBLE CURB RAMP
10'-5"

WITHIN THE LOADING &

UNLOADING ACCESS

AISLE, PAINT THE WORDS
"NO PARKING IN 12" HIGH
LETTERS MIN.
1'-0"

RAMP UP
(E) DETECTABLE WARNING

MAT W/ TRUNCATED DOMES

TO RUN FULL DEPTH & WIDTH

OF RAMP

GROOVED
BORDER
CONC

WALKWAY

2.3-2.4"

2.3-2.4"
PLAN

ELEVATION
1 1/2" MIN.

DETECTABLE

WARNING MAT

SURFACE SHALL BE
YELLOW & APPROX.

FS 33538 OF

FEDERAL
STANDARD 595C,

PER CBC
11B-705.1.1.3.1

TRUNCATED
DOMES
TOP DIA.
.45-.47"
BASE DIA.
.9-.92"

0.2" TALL

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/18/2025 9:54:06 AM
23035.00

FIRE LIFE SAFETY PLANS
G-201
03/18/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERS SPACE PERMIT SET 03/18/2025
1" = 20'-0"1 SITE PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"2 SECOND FLOOR MAKERS SPACE - OCCUPANT LOAD 1 1/2" = 1'-0"4

EXISTING ACCESSIBLE PARKING
SINAGE
1/4" = 1'-0"3

EXISTING ACCESSIBLE PARKING
STALL
6" = 1'-0"5

EXISTING ACCESSIBLE WARMING
MAT
E:

03/28/2025

0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025
E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1086

(E) BEAM OR JOIST BELOW

PLAN LEGEND
(E) STL COLUMN BELOW

BEAM OR JOIST BELOW

SLEEPER/CURB
5 6
C.9
D
D.8
E
26' - 5 3/8"
4' - 6" 24' - 6" 3' - 3"
S-001
3 S-001
2 (E)W21x44
(E)W21x44
(E)W21x44
(E)W24x62 (E)W24x62 (E)W21x44
(E)W33x118
(E)W33x118
(E) 14" TJL @ 24", TYP. U.ON.

OPNG FOR SOLATUBE

CAPTURE ZONE, LOCATE
BTWN (E) JOISTS.;
TYP. OF (4)
18½"x18½"
MECH. OPNG
S-001
2 Sim 2C
S-001
(E) 3/4" T&G

PLYWD SHTG
(E) HIGH ROOF

ABOVE NOT SHOWN
3C
S-001
9' - 4" 1' - 9 1/2"
VIF
7' - 7" 10' - 0"
VIF
6' - 11"
TYP.

DELIVERY ZONE IN CEILING BELOW,
S.A.D. FOR EXACT LOCATIONS,
TYP. OF (4)
(E)W18x35

STRAPS &

SLEEPERS
PER 2A&
2B/S -001
6 (6)A34 TO (E) TJL
W/ #9x1½" SD @
EA. 4x6
.

SLEEPER TO

BEAR FULLY ON
(E) TJL EA. END

REMOVE & REPLACE (E)
ROOFING, S.A.D.
3C
S-001
(E)W21x44
4x6 FLAT SLEEPER

PLAN - BASE A
DBL 2x6 STUD
W/A34 EA. SIDE. T&B
W/ #9x1½" SD,
TYP U.O.N.
® ISOLATORS ABV
® ISOLATORS ABV
4x6 FLAT SLEEPER
4x4 BLKG T&B W/
2-8d TOENAILS E.F.,
TYP.
1/2" PLYWD
W/ 10d @ 6" EDGE NAILING
& 10d @ 12" FIELD NAILING,
TYP. (4) FACES
(2)2x6 @ CORNERS
W/ 4 -8d TOENAILs
T&B
(E) 14" TJL @ 24"
TYP.
6"

SOLARTUBE SUPPORT

FRAMING,
SEE . /2 S-001
(E) 14" TJL
@ 24"
2x4 FLAT,

CUT TO FIT SNUG,

INSTALL FROM BELOW
(E) PLYWOOD,
TYP. OF (6)
CS14x6' -0"
EA. SIDE
1' - 8 1/2"
VIF
1' - 8 1/2"

EDGE OF (N)

OPNG IN (E)
3/4" PLYWD
10d @ 4" @
EDGES
2C
S-001

REMOVE &

REPLACE (E)

ROOFING,
S.A.D.

OPENING A
1' - 0" 1' - 0"
6' - 4"

SECTION C
(E) 14" TJL @ 24"
BLKG
PER "A"
STRAP PER "A"

SLEEPERS AND
HARDWARE PER "B"
S.A.D. FOR EXACT LOCATION OF

DELIVERY ZONE IN CEILING

SOLAR TUBE,
S.A.D.

T.O. (E) PLYWD
VIF

CEILING
S.A.D.
3' - 10 5/8"
.
26"x26" PREFAB CURB,
S.A.D.

ROOFING, S.A.D.
2' - 2"
2C
S-001
6x RIPPED TO

MATCH HEIGHT OF
(E) INSULATION,
4" TO 6" VIF
A34, TYP. OF (4)
A34, TYP. OF (4)
NOTE : SEE "A" FOR INFO NOT SHOWN.

CURB SUPPORT B
(E) 14" TJL
@ 24"
6 CENTER SLEEPERS

ON PANEL POINTS

OF (E) TJL BELOW

SECTION B
T.O. (E) PLYWD
VIF
EF-1 W/ SPRING ISOLATORS,
S.M.D.

ROOFING, S.A.D.

NOTE: "SEE "A" & "B" FOR INFO NOT SHOWN.

PER . /2 S-001
(E) W21x44
1' - 7"

PLYWD SPAN,
TYP @ (4) SIDES
1/2" PLYWOOD SHEATHING
W/10d @ 6" EDGE NAILING &
10d @ 12" FIELD NAILING
6 3C
S-001
SPRING

ISOLATOR,
S.M.D.,
TYP. OF (4)
250# EF -1

EXHAUST FAN,
S.M.D.
(E)W21x44
4x6 FLAT
4x6 FLAT

PLYWOOD

SHEATHING ABOVE

NOT SHOWN FOR

CLARITY
W/ MECH.

COORDINATE

PLAN - PLATFORM B
8"
4x6 FLAT
W/(4)A34
4x6 FLAT
W/(4)A34
4x4 BLKG T&B W/
2-8d TOENAILS E.F.,
TYP.
5 4

S AN FR AN CI S C O
CALIFORNI A 94107
415 . 489 .2 224 TEL
415 .358 .91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH L F OR OSTE. ,402
5 4

S AN FR AN CIS C O
CALIFORNI A 94107
415 . 489 .2 224 TEL
415 .358 .91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH L F OR OSTE. ,402
5 4

S AN FR AN CIS C O
CALIFORNI A 94107
415 . 489 .2 224 TEL
415 .358 .91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH L F OR OSTE. ,402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATE ISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST # DATE
As indicated
3/13/2025 5:41:32 PM
23,036.00

STRUCTURAL NOTES,

ROOF PLAN, DETAILS
S-001
02/25/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERS SPACE PERMIT SET 02/25/2025

PLAN NOTES
1 SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ALL DIMENSIONS, FINISH FLOOR ELEVATIONS, SLOPE AND DRAINAGE NOT SHOWN.
2 ALL (E) DIMENSIONS TO BE VERIFIED IN FIELD.
3 CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY EOR OF DISCREPANCIES PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK.
1/4" = 1'-0" S-001
1 ROOF PLAN

STRUCTURAL NOTES
DIVISION 01: GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION A: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. These Structural Notes apply to the San Carlos Library Maker Space in San Carlos, CA.

2. All work shall conform to the 2022 California Building Code, as modified by state and local jurisdiction.

3. These Structural Notes supplement the Project Specifications, and provide design loads and material properties not listed in the Project Specifications.

4. These structural drawings are copyrighted instruments of service of Mar Structural Design (MSD), for sole use for this project.

5. The Structural Drawings show the structural features. Some dimensions and elevations are defined on the Architectural Drawings. See Architectural and other project drawings for finishes, curbs, openings, inserts and other features that need to be coordinated with these drawings.

6. In the event of conflict between these structural notes, the project specifications and the drawings, consult with the Architect before proceeding.

7. Verify all existing conditions and dimensions. Compare structural drawings with architectural, mechanical, and electrical and plumbing drawings before commencing work. Notify Architect of any discrepancies and do not proceed with affected work until they are resolved. In the case of conflict between the drawings and the specifications, the most costly option to the Contractor applies unless otherwise expressly allowed by the Architect’s response to RFI.

8. All work shown is new unless called out as existing (E).

9. Do not scale the drawings to determine dimensions, instead use written dimensions. Where no dimension is provided, consult with the Architect for clarification before proceeding with the work. Where member locations are not specifically dimensioned, members are either located on column lines, or equally spaced between members on column lines or between members otherwise located.

10. The Contractor and Special Inspector shall contact the Architect and Structural Engineer regarding any questions of interpretation of these specifications and drawings.

12. Safety Measures:

1. Contractor is solely and completely responsible for job site conditions including safety of people and property, and for all necessary independent engineering reviews of these conditions.

13. Any openings, holes, cuts or discontinuities not shown on the structural drawings and extending into or through structural elements require Engineer’s prior approval and may require special structural detailing.

DIVISION 06: WOOD
SECTION 06 10 00: ROUGH CARPENTRY

1. Wood connector call-outs on the Drawings refer to Simpson Strong-Tie Connectors unless otherwise noted. See Specifications regarding possible substitution of other manufacturer’s connectors may only be used if approved as an equal or better substitution, substantiated by evaluation service reports and Simpson- equivalent reference numbers and labels. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings:

1. Fill all fastener holes with the maximum number, diameter and length of fasteners (nails, bolts, etc.).

2. Grading:

Item
Studs
Grade
No. 2
Posts, Beams & Timbers ( ≥4x)
Sill & Top Plates
Joists & Stringers
Ledgers
No. 2
No. 2
No. 2
Blocking & Nailers
Plates & Misc.

No. 2 or Construction
No. 2

3. Refer to minimum fastening schedule in CBC Table 2304.10.1, except where more restrictive requirements are given on the drawings.

1. All framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir-Larch graded per WCLIB Grading Rules. All lumber shall be surfaced dry (SD, MC 19 or less) or kiln dried (KD, MC 19 or less). MC = Maximum moisture content at initial use, in percent.

2. For straps where manufacturer offers nailed or bolted alternatives, install nails.

2. All machine bolts through wood shall be ASTM A307, installed through holes 1/16 inch larger than diameter of bolt. Provide washers under all bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood. Provide malleable iron washers (ASTM A47) unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Provide standard steel cut washers (ASTM F844) only where specifically allowed on the drawings.

3. All wood and wood products in contact with concrete or masonry shall be pressure- treated. Species and grade for pressure-treated products shall match that specified for untreated similar lumber or wood products (i.e., pressure-treated Hem-Fir may not be substituted for pressure-treated Douglas-Fir), unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

4. Corrosion-resistant fasteners and washers shall be used where exposed to weather or soil, or in contact with pressure-preservative-treated or fire-retardant- treated wood. Refer to the Specifications for additional requirements.

SECTION 06 11 00: FRAMING LUMBER
No. 1

5. Framing members and sheathing noted "P.T." shall be preservative treated to AWPA UC3B u.o.n.

4. Fire-Treated Lumber: Dricon (ICC ESR-4584) by Arch Wood Production, Inc., or Pyro-Guard (UL ER7002-01) by Hoover Treated Wood PRoducts, Inc., or approved equal or better substitution. Minimum strength reduction factor of 0.95 for Douglas Fir-Larch framing and 0.9 for connections for minimum temperature of 150°. Fire-retardant treated members shall be unincised. 1" = 1'-0" S-001
3 EXHAUST FAN SUPPORT FRAMING
1" = 1'-0" S-001
2 SOLAR TUBE OPENING & CURB

2. Roof sheathing:

1. APA-rated sheathing, Exposure 1, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2. Plywood per DOC PS-1 (not OSB per DOC PS-2).

3. 15/32” (1/2” nominal) thickness, unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

4. All roof sheathing nails shall be deformed shank.

SECTION 06 12 00: WOOD STRUCTURAL PANELS: PLYWOOD

3. Fire-treated plywood:

1. Dricon (ICC ESR-4584) by Arch Wood Protection, Inc., or Pyro-Guard FRT (UL ER7002-01) by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc., or equal or better substitution. Minimum strength reduction factor of 0.9 for connections for minimum temperature of 150°.

STRUCTURAL ABBREVIATIONS

ABV ABOVE

BLKG BLOCKING

BTWN BETWEEN
(E) EXISTING

EA EACH
E.F. EACH FACE

INFO INFORMATION

MECH MECHANICAL
(N) NEW

OPNG OPENING

PLYWD PLYWOOD

REQ'D REQUIRED
S.A.D. SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
S.M.D. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

STL STEEL

T&B TOP AND BOTTOM

TYP TYPICAL
& AND
@ AT
# POUND

1. Wall sheathing:

1. APA-rated CDX, Exposure 1, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2. Plywood meeting DOC PS-1.

3. Thickness: 15/32” (1/2” nominal), unless otherwise shown on the drawings.

6. Pre-drill holes when fastening into (E) TJI.
03/18/2025

E:

03/28/2025

0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025
E:
03/28/2025

PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE

FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPLICABLE

CALIFORNIA BUILDING, PLUMBING, MECHANICAL,

ELECTRICAL, AND ENERGY CODES AS AMENDED
BY THE JURISDICTION.

PLAN REVIEW ACCEPTANCE OF DOCUMENTS

DOES NOT AUTHORIZE CONSTRUCTION TO

PROCEED IN VIOLATION OF ANY FEDERAL,
STATE, NOR LOCAL REGULATION.

BY: ___________________ DATE: _________________
WEST COAST CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. (WC3)
Donald Zhao
05/23/2025

JOB COPY

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1087

UP
C.9
D
D.8
E
5 6

INFORMAL

COLLABORATION ZONE
20 MIN RATED PTD DOOR

WITH VISION LITE
7'-0 1/2"

WHITEBOARD WITH

STORAGE BELOW

BENCH SEATING

WITH STORAGE
BELOW

CLOSED LOCKABLE

STORAGE WITH

WRITABLE SURFACE
DOORS

ADJUSTABLE SHELVES / DISPLAY

PORTALS WITH

LOCKABLE STORAGE BELOW
26'-5 3/8" V.I.F.
4'-6" 24'-6" 3'-3"

SAFETY ZONE WITH

FIRE EXTINGUISHER,

FIRST AID, ECT
DOUBLE
SINK
E. COLUMN
1 HR RATED WALL
ASSEMBLY @ CORRIDOR
45 MIN RATED WINDOW

ASSEMBLY

BENCH SEATING WITH

STORAGE BELOW
2 A-901
8 A-901
5 A-901
4 3
6 7 A-901

STORAGE CABINET
6'-0"

WET ZONE
10'-4"
MAKERS
SPACE
132
WINDOW
5'-0" V.I.F.

DISPLAY
5'-0" V.I.F.

WINDOW
5'-0" V.I.F.

DISPLAY
5'-0" V.I.F.

ACOUSTIC WALL BY
OTHER. MAINTAIN
STC 62 RATING
ALONG THE WALL.

PROVIDE ACOUSTIC

PUTTY PAD AT

OUTLETS
12'-0"

PROTOTYPING ZONE
15'-8"
A3Z-A
1A3Z-A
1A3Z-A
A3Z
132A

NEW RECESSED
FLOOR BOX. NOTE

EXISTING SLAB IS PT

SLAB, NEED TO

XRAY BEFORE

LOCATING FLOOR
BOXES
G2X
A-652
13 SEATING AREA
8'-2"

PEGBOARD STORAGE
6'-0"3'-0"
10'-0"
10'-0"
9'-3"

MAKER EQUIPMENT,

SEE EQUIPMENT
PLAN
(E) COLUMN TO REMAIN
Y
(N) SURFACE

MTD PANEL
'LP2D', SED.

C.9
D
D.8
E
5 6
4'-6" 24'-6" 3'-3"
C2
C2
C2
T1
T1
T1
T1
C1 C1
C1C1
C1 C1
C1C1 C1
C1 C1
C1
C1 C1
C1C1
2 A-901
8 A-901
5 A-901
4 3
6 7 A-901
EQ-1
EQ-2
EQ-3
EQ-4
EQ-5
EQ-6
EQ-7
EQ-8
3D PRINTER WITH

LOCKABLE

MATERIAL STORAGE

AND WASTE BELOW

LASER CUTTER AND

AIR FILTER WITH

LOCKABLE SHEET

STORAGE BELOW

VINYL CUTTER AND

LOCKABLE ROLL

STORAGE BELOW

MONITOR ON CART

WITH CASTERS

LAPTOP & IPAD

STORAGE CART

STORED IN TALL

CABINET
26'-5"
6'-0"
1'-10"
(N) SURFACE

MTD PANEL
'LP2D', SED.

C.9
D
D.8
E
5 6
26'-5 3/8"
4'-6" 24'-6" 3'-3"

REMOVE (E) DOOR TO HALLWAY
(E) COLUMN TO REMAIN
NOTE: CITY AGREED TO LOCATE (E) F.E. &

DEFIBULATOR TO OTHER SIDE OF THE

HALLWAY
7'-3"
1'-3"
1'-7"
REMOVE (E) FURRING. (E)

COLUMN TO REMAIN
LEGEND

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE

DEMOLISHED

EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO
REMAIN
1/4" = 1'-0"2 FLOOR PLAN - MAKERS SPACE
1/4" = 1'-0"3 FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT PLAN - MAKERS SPACE

FURNITURE SCHEDULE

MARK CATEGORY QTY MANUFACTURER PRODUCT FINISH LOCATION UPHOLSTERY

UPHOLSTERY

COLOR SIZE VENDOR COMMENTS
C1 ADJUSTABLE

BARSTOOL
16 Andreu World NUEZ - BQ2738 6002 MAKERS SPACE UP-01 0351 MG WEST C2 POUF 3 HBF TRISCAPE UP-01 MAKERS SPACE UP-01 0351 MG WEST T1 BUTCHER BLOCK

WORKSTATION
4 3BRANCH MAKER TABLE TOP: SOLID MAPLE;
BASE: PLATINUM

METALLIC
MAKERS SPACE 60" W x 30" D x
27-42" H

MG WEST ADJUSTABLE HEIGHT MAKER TABLE W/ CASTERS

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/27/2025 12:58:42 PM
23035.00

SECOND FLOOR PLAN,

EQUIPMENT PLAN,

FURNITURE PLAN, DEMO
PLAN
A-102
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET 03/28/2025
1/4" = 1'-0"1 DEMO PLAN - MAKERS SPACE

EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

MARK CATEGORY QTY MANUFACTURER PRODUCT BY OWNER COMMENTS EQ-1 3D PRINTER 1 ULTA MAKER ULTIMAKER S5 x
EQ-2 3D PRINTER 1 ULTA MAKER ULTIMAKER S3 x
EQ-3 LASER CUTTER 1 GLOFORGE GLOFORGE PRO x
EQ-4 GLOFORGE AIR
FILTER
1 GLOFORGE GLOFORGE AIR FILTER x
EQ-5 VINYL CUTTER 1 TITAN TITAN 3 x 15" CRAFT; TABLE MOUNT EQ-6
Electric Height
Adjustable Flat
Panel Stand
1 Chief POWERED HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE CART x HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE: 50.8" - 76.3" EQ-7 DEVICE CHARGING
CART
1 BRETFORD CUBE CART x 37.5" H X 24" W X 24" D ; GREY COLOR EQ-8 TV 1 SAMSUNG SAMSUNG 65" NEO SMART QLED TV x 57" W X 35 1/16" H X 10 7/8" D E:
03/28/2025
0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025

E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1088

UP
C.9
D
D.8
E
5 6
SOLATUBE 300DS-C

CLOSED CEILING
(E) ROOF

PARAPET
26'-5 3/8"
4'-6" 24'-6" 3'-3"

VERIFY LOCATION OF

JOISTS IN FIELD
(E) ROOF DRAIN
21 A-602
(E) CLAY TILE
ROOF
1'-8.5 VIF
7'-7" VIF 10'-0" 7'-0"
9'-4" 1'-9 1/2"
5'-0"
6'-4"

REMOVE AND REPLACE
ROOFING AS REQ. FOR
ROOF PENETRATIONS.

SEE DTL

FOR TRANSIITON FROM
(N) ROOFING TO (E)

ROOFING
4'-0"
16'-10"
20 A-602(E) FLAT ROOF
16 A-602
19 A-602
8'-8"

PROVIDE CRICKETS AS
REQ. VERIFY (E) ROOF
SLOPE
EXHAUST FAN, SMD.
19 / A-602
C.9
D
E
5 6
EUREKA ATOLL 72"

SUSPENDED LIGHTING

FIXTURES

SEE LIGHTING PLAN
HUBBEL

COMMERCIAL

CORD REEL

ROOF PARAPET ABOVE
26'-5 3/8"
3'-3"
7'-0"
CL-03
7'-0"
CL-01
7'-0"
CL-03

MECHOSHADE ECOVEIL
7'-11"
1'-10"
6'-0"
3'-6"
29'-0"
8'-1"
3 A-602
8 A-602
18 A-602
14 A-602
21 A-602
12 A-602
10'-0"
CL-02
7'-0"
CL-03
7'-0"
CL-01
7'-7" 6'-0" 15'-5"
2'-11" 10'-0" 10'-0" 3'-6"
EQ EQ
2'-0"2'-0"2'-0"
3'-3" 3'-3"
11" 3'-3"
3'-9" 6" 3'-3" 3'-9"1'-10"
3'-7" 4'-0" 18'-0" 3'-5"
1'-3"1'-3"
17 A-602
15 A-602
2'-1"
EQ EQ
EQ EQ
EQ EQ

NOTESLEGEND
CL-02: ACOUSTIC CEILING

TILE, UON

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. LOCATE ALL SPRINKLER HEADS, SMOKE DECTECTORS, SPEAKERS, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,

PLUMBING, FIRE ALARM AND OTHER CEILING MOUNTED ITEMS AT THE CENTER OF ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE PANELS UON.

SPRINKLER DESIGN IS A DEFFERED SUBMITTAL SPRINKLER HEAD SPACING TO BE VERIFIED IN DEFERRED SUBMITTAL.

CENTER CEILING GRID IN ROOM, BOTH DIRECTIONS, UON.

ALIGN EDGES OF RECESSED LINEAR LIGHTING WITH ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID, UON.

CENTER LINEAR PENDANT LIGHTING ON ACOUSTICAL CEILING GRID, UON.

COVE LIGHTING - VERIFY LENGTHS IN FIELD PRIOR TO INSTALLATION.

SEE TECHNOLOGY PACKAGE FOR TYPES AND QUANTITIES OF EQUIPMENT.

LIGHTING INSTALLER TO COORDINATE IDF ROOM LIGHTING LAYOUT. SEE TECHNOLOGY PACKAGE FOR MORE INFORMATION REGARDING IDF ROOM EQUIPMENT.

SEE A-602 SHEET FOR TYPICAL CEILING DETAILS.

CL-03: PERFERATED MTL CEILING
SUPPLY

DIFFUSER
RETURN

DIFFUSER

EXHAUST

DIFFUSER

ACCESS PANEL

MECHOSHADE ECOVEIL
3% OPEN
10'-6 1/2"
CL-02

CEILING HEIGHT ABOVE

LEVEL DATUM

EXIT SIGN

FOR ACCESS PANELS, DIFFUSERS
& GRILLES NOT SHOWN, SEE

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS
WC-1
CEILING TYPEPT-03

CEILING FINISH, WO
CL-01: PTD GYPSUM BOARD

CEILING
1/4" = 1'-0"2

REFLECTED CEILING PLAN -
MAKERS SPACE 1/4" = 1'-0"1 ROOF PLAN

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/27/2025 12:58:48 PM
23035.00

SECOND FLOOR RCP,

ROOF PLAN
A-103
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET 03/28/2025
E:
03/28/2025
0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025

E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1089

LEVEL 2
14'-0"

CUSTOM PERFERATED

PEGBOARD, W/ ACOUSTIC

BACKING AND ADJUSTABLE
SHELVES; WD VENEER TO
MATCH WD-01
SEE

HUBBEL COMMERCIAL

CORD REEL
9 A-901
11 / A-901
5'-11"
7'-0"
1'-10"
LEVEL 2
14'-0"
7'-0"
GYP-01
SM-01
UP-01

UNDER BENCH STORAGE
WD-01
5 A-652
PT-02
A-652
17 Y132 8'-0"
5'-6"
LEVEL 2
14'-0"
SS-01UP-01

TALL LOCKABLE STORAGE
12'-0"

PROTOTYPING ZONE
15'-8"
SM-01 SM-01 SM-01 SM-01

CURVED SOFFIT

FULL HEIGHT LOCKABLE CASEWORK WITH POWER
AND ADJUSTABLE INTERIOR SHELVES; WD-01
WITH SM-01 WRITABLE DOORS

LOCKABLE MATERIAL

STORAGE TO SUPPORT

EQUIP ABOVE
2'-10"

COLLABORATION ZONE
8'-2"
EQ-1
EQ-2
EQ-3
EQ-4 EQ-5
SM-03
WD-01
SM-03
11 A-651
13 A-602
16 A-651
7 A-651
3 A-651
7'-0"
1'-6"
12 A-651
SIM.
5'-2"
LEVEL 2
14'-0"
WD-01
SS-01
2'-10"
10'-0"
EQ-4 EQ-5
SM-03
LEVEL 2
14'-0"

WET ZONE
9'-6 1/4"

DOCKING STATION
6'-0"
7'-0"
WT-01
WD-01
SS-01

DOUBLE SINK

LOCKABLE STORAGE WITH UNDERMOUNT

PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER

TRASH RECEPTICLES
EQ-8
EQ-6
2'-10"
2 A-651
12 A-651
14 A-651
11 A-701
132A
LEVEL 2
14'-0"
GYP-01
WD-01
10'-0"
5 A-901
LEVEL 2
14'-0"
WD-01

EXISTING WINDOW TO REMAIN
PT-02
2'-10"
SS-01

ALL BELOW COUNTER STORAGE LOCKABLE

MECHOSHADE ECOVEIL
A-652
19 2'-0" 11"
11"1'-6"11"
1'-6"1'-0"
1'-6"
1'-0"
6"
EQ-5
1/2" = 1'-0"
1 MAKERS SPACE 132
2 3
4 5
6 7

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
1/2" = 1'-0"
3/27/2025 1:22:09 PM
23035.00

INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
A-501
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET 03/28/2025
0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025

E:

03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1090

PARTITION TYPES
5/8" GYP BD

EA SIDE

MTL STUDS

ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION

TYPICAL UON

FINISH WO

SEE PARTITION
NOTES
WIDTH

OVERALL

A ONE LAYER EACH SIDE
+7'-2"1A4W-A

STUD SIZE

HEAD/SILL CONDITION
*

ADDITIONAL SPECIAL CONDITION AND/OR

PARTIAL HEIGHT (LEFT BLANK IF NONE)

PARTITION TYPE
RATING

ACOUSTIC ASSEMBLY, STC AS NOTED

WITHOUT GYP BOARD ON ONE SIDE
SPECIAL CONDITIONS:
- = NON RATED
1 = 1 HOUR RATED
RATING CODE:
: EXTEND GYP BD AS INDICATED TO STRUCTURAL ABOVE
HEIGHT CODE:

Z = FULL HEIGHT

PARTITION TAG
0 = 7/8" HAT CHANNEL
1 = 1 5/8" METAL STUD
2 = 2 1/2" METAL STUD
3 = 3 5/8" METAL STUD
4 = 4" METAL STUD
6 = 6" METAL STUD
8 = 8" METAL STUD
STUD SIZE CODE:

A =
B =

SPECIAL CONDITION

PROVIDE FIRE RATED WALL IDENTIFICATION

ABOVE CEILING

PROVIDE PENETRATION IDENTIFICATION LABELS

AT FIRE STOPPING
FIRE RATED PARTITION :

PARTITION NOTESPARTITION DETAILS
5/8" GYP BD

EA SIDE

MTL STUDS

ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION

TYPICAL UON

G STUD FURRING
WIDTH

OVERALL
NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY (E) CORRIDOR STUDS SIZE IS 3 5/8". CORRIDOR WALL

THICKENESS TO MATCH EXISTING
6 / A-601

PARTITION AS SCHEDULED

ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
FASTENER, S.S.D.

SCHD. FLOOR FINISH
1/4"
SEALANT - TYP. @ GYP. BD.
-FIRE BARRIER SEALANT @ OUTSIDE
LAYER OF GYP. BD. @ FIRE RATED

PARTITION
-ACOUSTIC SEALANT @ ACOUSTIC

PARTITIONS
ACOUS. INSUL

PARTITION AS SCHEDULED
(E) COMPOSITE

DECK WITH

INSULATION
CONT. SEALANT @
JOINTS, TYP.
1/2" TYP.

METAL STUD SCHEDULE
REF.: STEEL STUD MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ESR #3064P)

NOMINAL
SIZE

CATALOG
SIZE

MINIMUM PROPERTIES
1x in Sx in Ma in-k

INTERIOR STUDS
4 3
250S125-43
362S125-54
400S162-33
400S162-43
400S162-54
600S125-54
800S125-54

0.228

0.661

0.692

0.892

1.098

2.236

4.593

0.182

0.365

0.299

0.417

0.526

0.745

1.148

3.43 9.62

5.91 8.23

10.39 17.34

23.18 INTERIOR TRACKS
2 1/2" x 18 GA
3 5/8" x 16 GA
4" X 20 GA
4" X 18 GA
4" x 16 GA
6" x 16 GA
8" x 16 GA
2-1/2" x 16 GA
2-1/2" x 16 GA
2-1/2" x 16 GA
3-5/8" x 16 GA
3-5/8" x 16 GA
3-5/8" x 16 GA
4" x 16 GA
4" x 16 GA
4" x 16 GA
6" x 16 GA
6" x 16 GA
6" x 16 GA
250T125-54
250T150-54
250T200-54
362T125-54
362T150-54
362T200-54
400T125-54
400T150-54
400T200-54
600T125-54
600T150-54
600T200-54

0.297

0.325

0.371

0.678

0.735

0.832

0.849

0.918

1.037

2.344

2.611

3.145

0.188

0.197

0.209

0.312

0.325

0.345

0.359

0.374

0.397

0.756

0.843

1.015

5.64 5.89

6.25 9.34

9.74 10.34

10.74 11.19

11.88 17.73

18.24 21.48
TYP. TRACK @ 2-1/2" STUDS

TOP TRACK

CAPPING TRACK
TYP. TRACK @ 3-5/8" STUDS

TOP TRACK

CAPPING TRACK
TYP. TRACK @ 4" STUDS

TOP TRACK

CAPPING TRACK
TYP. TRACK @ 6" STUDS

TOP TRACK

CAPPING TRACK

SPACING
(INCHES)
16 16
16 16
16 16
16 Z

STRUCTURE

FIN CEILING

STRUCTURE
Z = FULL HEIGHT

EXTEND GYP BD

ON BOTH SIDES

TO STRUCTURE
ABOVE

PARTITION AS SCHEDULED
OUTLET, EQUIP. OR RECEPTACLES W.O.

OUTLET BOX RESILIENT PAD AROUND
OUTLET. EQUIP. OR RECEPTACLES W.O.

FILL 1/4" GAP WITH ACOUSTICAL

SEALANT ALL AROUND PERIMETER

SEAL OUTLET BOX AIRTIGHT WITH SHEET

CAULKING (PADS)
PTN
TYPE
STUD
SIZE

OVERALL
WIDTH

FIRE ACOUSTICAL

RATING (STC)

WO REMARKS
RATING
(HR) DESIGN #
1A3Z 3 5/8" 4 7/8" 1 HR UL 407 62
A3Z 3 5/8" 4 7/8" NR 62

1. PARTITION TYPES ARE KEYED ON FLOOR PLANS; SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR PARTITION EXTENT.

2. ALL OTHER PARTITION FRAMING SHALL EXTEND TO UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING OR DECK, UON.

3. AT ALL DOORS, WINDOWS & CASED OPENINGS STUDS SHALL BE FULL HEIGHT.

4. PARTITIONS SHALL BE TIGHT-FITTING AROUND ALL STRUCTURAL SHAPES AND PENETRATIONS.

5. PROVIDE 5/8" TYPE "X" GYP BD THROUGHOUT, UON.

6. FOR LOCATIONS WITH CERAMIC TILE ON PARTITIONS, SEE FINISH PLANS. USE 5/8" TILE BACKING PANEL BEHIND TILE & 5/8" MOISTURE RESISTANT GWB WHERE GWB IS EXPOSED ABOVE.

7. PROVIDE ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION AT PARTITION STUD CAVITIES THROUGHOUT, UON.

8. PROVIDE ACOUSTIC PUTTY PADS AT ALL J-BOXES LOCATED IN PARTITIONS THROUGHOUT, UON.

9. PROVIDE CONTINUOUS PERIMETER ACOUSTIC SEALANT AT PARTITION TO FLOOR AND PARTITION TO CEILING JOINTS THROUGHOUT, UON.

10. COMPENSATION TRACKS: REFER TO FRAMING DETAILS FOR MORE INFORMATION.

11. COORDINATE PARTITION FRAMING WITH REQUIRED STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR WORK.

12. ON CONTINUOUS WALL SURFACE WHERE CONSTRUCTION INVOLVES MORE THAN ONE MATERIAL, FINISH, OR MATERIAL THICKNESS, ALIGN FACE OF FINISH UON.

13. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ELEMENTS SUCH AS DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUITS, EQUIPMENT, ETC SO AS TO MINIMIZE THE IMPACT ON PARTITION FRAMING. WHERE COORDINATION OF

ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORK WITH PARTITION FRAMING REQUIRES MODIFICATION OF PARTITION FRAMING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SUCH MODIFICATION, AS APPROVED BY THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER.

14. ITEMS PENETRATING THROUGH EITHER SIDE OF PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE OF

SMOKE/FIRE-RATED PARTITION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPS WITH EQUIVALENT TIME RATING AS PARTITION RATING. FIRE STOP SHALL BE "F" RATED TO BE EQUAL OR GREATER THAN PARTITION FIRE RATING. MEMBRANE

FIRESTOP PROTECTION IS NOT REQUIRED FOR STEEL AND ELECTRICAL BOXES THAT DO NOT EXCEED 16 SQ INCHES IN AREA, PROVIDED THAT AREA DOES NOT EXCEED 100 SQ INCHES IN A 100 SQ FEET. OUTLET BOXES LOCATED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF THE WALL SHALL BE SEPARATED BY 24 INCHES MINIMUM.

15. FOR JUNCTION BOX DETAIL AT ACOUSTICAL PARTITION, SEE _________.

16. SPLICES IN STUDS AND BRACES SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED.

17. PROVIDE STUDS, TRACKS AND BRACING PER METAL STUD SCHEDULE.

18. ALL STUDS AND TRACKS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A653, A1008 OR A1011.

19. STUDS & TRACKS 18GA AND LIGHTER SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM YIELD POINT OF 33 KSI.

20. STUDS & TRACKS 16GA AND HEAVIER SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM YIELD POINT OF 50 KSI.

21. ALL STUDS AND TRACKS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY CURRENT MEMBERS OF THE STEEL STUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SSMA) LISTED IN ICBO REPORT NO. 4934P. ALL STUDS AND TRACK SHALL COMPLY WITH ICBO REPORT NO. 4934P.

22. ALL FRAMING COMPONENTS SHALL BE CUT SQUARELY OR ON AN ANGLE (SUCH AS BRACING) TO SQUARELY FIT AGAINST ABUTTING MEMBERS. MEMBERS SHALL BE HELD FIRMLY IN POSITION UNTIL PROPERLY FASTENED.

23. STUDS AND TRACKS SHALL BE ATTACHED BY SHEET METAL SCREWS AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS.

24. PUNCH-OUTS MAY BE LOCATED ALONG THE CENTERLINE OF THE WEBS OF FRAMING MEMBERS. PUNCH-OUTS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CENTER-TO-CENTER SPACING OF 24" AND BE 12-1/2" FROM MEMBER ENDS. PUNCH-OUTS SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM WIDTH OF HALF THE MEMBER DEPTH OR 2-1/2", WHICHEVER IS LESS, AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 4-1/2".

25. POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS (PAF) SHALL BE X-U AS MANUFACTURED BY HILTI. ICBO REPORT NO. 2269 OR APPROVED EUQAL. PROVIDE 0.08" THICK X 1.1" SQ OR

1.425" ROUND WASHERS FOR ALL POWDER ACTUATED FASTENERS. 3" = 1'-0"2 STUD BASE, TYP.
3" = 1'-0"3 RATED PARTITION HEAD

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/18/2025 9:54:14 AM
23035.00

INTERIOR PARTITION

SCHD AND DETAILS
A-601
03/18/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERS SPACE PERMIT SET 03/18/2025
3" = 1'-0"6 J BOX PENETRATION
CAVITY
PTN
TYPE
STUD
SIZE

OVERALL
WIDTH

FIRE ACOUSTICAL

RATING (STC)

WO REMARKS
RATING
(HR) DESIGN #
G2X 2 1/2" 3 1/8" NR
E:

03/28/2025

0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025
E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1091

HANGER WIRE

SNAP CONNECTION

SPLICE JOINT
NOTE:

REFER TO CEILING SUSPENSION

NOTES ON THIS SHEET

COMPRESSION POST, ONE AT EACH

SEISMIC BRACE LOCATION

SLOT END OF TUBE TO FIT

OVER MAIN TEE

CROSS TEE
12 GA. SPLAY WIRE (4) BRACING
IN PLANE OF EA. RUNNER. ALL

WIRES SECURED TO RUNNERS
2" MAX FROM INTERSECTION

STRUCTRUAL MAIN TEE
MAX. LENGTH
5'-6"
7'-0"
MEMBER "A"
1" O.D. EMT
1 1/4" O.D. EMT
Kl/r
200
200
MEMBER "B"
1 1/4" O.D. EMT
1 1/2" O.D. EMT
Kl/r
157
165
NOTE: IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO INSTALL SEISMIC POSTS AT 144 SF

COMPRESSION POST SCHEDULE
MEMBER "A"
MEMBER "B"
45°
45°
45°
45°
2"MAX
.

N
E
S
W

PRIMARY
1" CLR

SLIP JOINT
"SPRING-CLIP" TYPE

EXPANSION JOINT
COVER
POP RIVETS, TYP.

CONT. RUNNERS
(SPLICE ALL JOINTS)

HANGER WIRE,
4'-0" O.C., TYP.
4'-0" OR LESS
CONT.

SPLICE
(TYP.) 8" MAX. 8" MAX.

NOTE: SLIP JOINT REQUIRED IN
CEILINGS EXCEEDING 2500 SF
PLAN
CONT. SLIP JOINT
(FREE END) SEE

CORRIDOR SLIP JOINT
@ INTERSECTION SEE

CONNECTED WALL
(FIXED END) SEE
8" MAX. HANGER WIRE
ATTACH ANGLE TO:

A) STUD W/ 1-1/4" S-12 PAN

HEAD SCREWS
B) STUD W/1-1/4" HI-LO
MOD. OVAL HEAD
ESB) #10 SMS @ 24" OC
MAX.

HANGER WIRE, TYP.

SEISMIC CLIP
ATTACH TO:

A) STUD W/1-1/4" S-12 PAN
HEAD SCREWS AT 12" O.C.

B) STUD W/1-1/4" HI-LO MOD.

OVAL HEAD
ESB) #10 SMS @ 24" O.C. MAX.

WALL ANGLE TO MATCH
T-BAR, TYP.

FIXED END FREE END
8" MAX.

FIXED END - ALTERNATE
GYP. BD. OVER MET. STUDS
HANGER WIRE, TYP.
16 GA 1-1/2"x1-1/2" CONT.

ANGLE. ATTACH TO EA.

SUTD W/ #8 S.M.S.

ATTACH ANGLE TO:

A) STUD W/1-1/4" S-12 PAN
HEAD SCREWS AT 12" O.C.

B) STUD W/1-1/4" HI-LO MOD.

OVAL HEAD
ESB) #10 SMS @ 24" O.C. MAX.

WALL ANGLE TO MATCH
T-BAR, TYP.
#8 S.M.S. FROM

CLIP TO RUNNER
3/4" MIN.
3/4" (MIN.) CLIP,
18 GA MIN.
#8 S.M.S.

FROM CLIP TO
ANGLE

SEISMIC CLIP

TIGHT SCREW AT

FIXED END
8" MAX.

LOOSE SCREW AT

FREE END
3/4"
MAX. 8"

EACH SIDE
6" MAX.

HANGER WIRE
#10 SELF-TAPPING SCREW

EACH STUD

SADDLE TIE TO MAIN
RUNNER W/ #18 WIRE
20 GA 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" CONT WALL
ANGLE

STRUCTURAL SLAB ABOVE

VARIES, SSD
MTL STUD 18 GA 4" @ 16" OC

SEE RCP

TYPICAL STUD BRACE
MAX
45°
PROVIDE J BEAD AT CORNER TRIM.

MTL STUD 18 GA 4" @ 16" OC

SEE RCP

TYPICAL STUD BRACE
MAX
45°
1/4"1"

PERORATED METAL PANEL CEILING
4"

CORD REEL MOUNTING PLATE BY MFR

ELECTRICAL CORD REEL,
MAX WEIGHT 20 LBS

DBL MTL STUD FRAMING W/ BRACE, SSD

J-BOX LOCATED ADJACENT TO
MOUNT
SCHD. ACT CEILING
1" 1"
(E) METAL DECK

STRUCTURAL SLAB ABOVE

VARIES, SSD

SEE RCP

EXISTING WALL PARTITION

1.5" SPREADER HOLD DOWN

1.5" X 2" BOX MOLDING

PERFORATED METAL PANEL

SLOTTED PANEL SUPPORT BEAM
FIZFELT ARO PLANK 1 AK, SEE
1/2" TYP.
8 / A-901
MTL STUD 18 GA 4" @ 16" OC

SEE RCP

TYPICAL STUD BRACE
MAX
45°

PROVIDE J BEAD AT CORNER
TRIM.
2"

SEE RCP
4 1/2"

SEE RCP
#10 SMS AT 8" O.C.

ACOUSTICAL CEILING
CLOSURE TRIM BY SHADE MFR.

BRACED 4" STUD

EXISTING EXTERIOR WINDOW

MECHOSHADE MANUAL SHADES

EXISTING PARTITION

ATTACH HANGER OR

DAMPERS WIRES TO LIGHT

FIXTURE AT OPPOSING

CORNERS AND ANCHORED

TO STRUCTURE SEE
NOTES #11 & #12

LIGHT FIXTURE,
SEE ELECT.

DWGS.

ACOUSTICAL CEILING
SUSPENDED T-BAR SYSTEM:

PROVIDE 12 GA. (MIN.) HANGER WIRES AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX ALONG MAIN RUNNERS.

PROVIDE 12 GA. HANGER WIRES AT THE ENDS OF ALL MAIN AND CROSS RUNNERS WITHIN 8" FROM THE SUPPORT OR WITHIN 1/4 OF THE LENGTH OF THE END TEE, WHICHEVER IS LEAST, AT THE PERIMETER OF THE CEILING AREA. END CONNECTIONS FOR RUNNERS WHICH ARE DESIGNED TO RESIST THE APPLIED HORIZONTAL FORCES MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF THE 12 GA. HANGER WIRES.

PROVIDE TRAPEZE OR OTHER SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORT MEMBERS AT OBSTRUCTIONS TO MAIN SPACING. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL HANGERS, STRUTS OR BRACES AS REQUIRED AT ALL CEILING BREAKS, SOFFITS OR DISCONTINUOUS AREA. HANGER WIRES THAT ARE MORE THAN 1 IN 6 OUT OF PLUMB ARE TO HAVE COUNTER-SLOPING WIRES.

CEILING GRID MEMBERS MAY BE ATTACHED TO NOT MORE THAN 2 ADJACENT WALLS. CEILING GRID MEMBERS SHOULD BE AT LEAST 1/2" FREE OF OTHER WALLS. IF WALLS RUN DIAGONALLY TO

CEILING GRID SYSTEM RUNNERS, ONE END OF MAIN AND CROSS RUNNERS, ONE END OF MAIN CROSS RUNNERS SHOULD BE FREE AND A MINIMUM OF 1/2" CLEAR OF WALL.

AT THE PERIMETER OF THE CEILING AREA WHERE MAIN OR CROSS RUNNER ARE NOT CONNECTED

TO THE ADJACENT WALL, PROVIDE INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE RUNNERS AT THE FREE END END TO PREVENT LATERAL SPREADING. A METAL STRUT OR A 16 GA. WIRE WITH A POSITIVE MECHANICAL CONNECTION TO THE RUNNER MAY BE USED. WHERE THE PERPENDICULAR DISTANCE FROM THE WALL TO THE FIRST PARALLEL RUNNER IS 12" OR LESS, THIS INTERLOCK IS NOT REQUIRED.

PROVIDE SETS OF FOUR 12 GA. SPLAYED BRACING WIRES ORIENTED 90 DEGREES FROM EACH AT 12 FEET BY 12 FEET ON CENTER (8 FEET BY 12 FEET AT SCHOOLS & 8 FEET BY 12 FEET AT ESSENTIAL SERVICES BLDGS). PROVIDE BRACING WIRES AT LOCATIONS NOT MORE THAN 1/2 THIS SPACINGS FROM EACH PERIMTER WALL AND AT THE EDGE OF VERTICAL CEILING OFFSETS. THE SLOPE OF THESE WIRES SHOULD NOT EXCEED 45 DEGREES FROM THE PLANE OF THE CEILING AND SHOULD BE TAUT WITHOUT CAUSING THE CEILING TO LIFT. SPLICES IN BRACING WIRES ARE NOT TO BE PERMITTED.

FASTEN HANGER WIRES WITH NOT LESS THAN 3 TIGHT TURNS WITHIN A DISTANCE OF 3 INCHES.

FASTEN BRACING WIRES WITH 4 TIGHT TURNS WITHIN A DISTANCE 1 1/2 INCHES. HANGER OR

BRACING WIRE ANCHORS TO THE STRUCTURE SHOULD BE INSTALLED IN SUCH A MANNER THAT THE

DIRECTION OF THE WIRE ALIGNS AS CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE WITH THE DIRECTION OF THE FORCES ACTING ON THE WIRE. NOTE: WIRE TURNS MADE BY MACHINE WHERE BOTH STRANDS HAVE BEEN DEFORMED OR BENT IN WRAPPING CAN WAIVE THE 1 1/2" REQUIREMENT, BUT THE NUMBER OF TURNS SHALL BE MAINTAINED, AND BE AS TIGHT AS POSSIBLE.

SEPARATE ALL CEILING HANGING AND BRACING WIRES AT LEAST 6 INCHES FROM ALL UNBRACED DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUIT, ETC. IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO ATTACH LIGHTWEIGHT ITEMS, SUCH AS SINGLE ELECTRICAL CONDUIT NOT TO EXCEED 3/4" NOMINAL DIAMETER, TO HANGER WIRES USING CONNECTORS.

WHEN DRILLED-IN CONCRETE ANCHORS OR SHOT-IN ANCHORS ARE USED IN REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR HANGER WIRES, 1 OUT OF 10 MUST BE FIELD TESTED FOR 200 POUNDS OF TENSION. WHEN DRILLED-IN CONCRETE ANCHORS ARE USED FOR BRACING WIRES, 1 OUT OF 2 MUST BE FIELD TESTED FOR 440 POUNDS IN TENSION. IF ANY SHOT-IN OR DRILLED-IN ANCHOR FAILS, SEE SECTION 2624 (d) TITLE 24.

ATTACH ALL LIGHT FIXTURES TO THE CEILING GRID RUNNERS TO RESIST A HORIZONTAL FORCE EQUAL TO THE WEIGHT OF THE FIXTURES.

FLUSH OR RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES AND AIR TERMINALS OR SERVICES WEIGHTING LESS THAN 56

POUNDS MAY BE SUPPORTED DIRECTLY ON THE RUNNERS OF A HEAVY DUTY GRID SYSTEM BUT, IN ADDITION,THEY MUST HAVE A MINIMUN OF TWO 12 GA. SLACK SAFETY WIRES ATTACHED TO THE FIXTURE AT DIAGONAL CORNERS AND ANCHORED TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE. ALL 4 FT. x 4 FT.

LIGHT FIXTURES MUST HAVE SLACK SAFETY WIRES AT EACH CORNER. ALL FLUSH OR RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES AND AIR TERMINALS OR SERVICES WEIGHTING 56 POUNDS OR MORE MUST BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED BY NOT LESS THAN 2 TAUT 12 GA. WIRES EACH ATTACHED TO THE

FIXTURE AT OPPOSING CORNERS AND TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE REGARDLESS OF THE TYPE OF CEILING GRID SYSTEM USED. THE 2 TAUT 12 GA. WIRES INCLUDING THEIR ATTACHMENT TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE MUST BE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING 4 TIMES THE WEIGHT OF THE UNIT.

ALL FIXTURES AND AIR TERMINALS OR SERVICES SUPPORTED ON HEAVY DUTY GRID SYSTEMS MUST BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED BY NOT LESS THAN 2 TAUT 12 GA. WIRES EACH ATTACHED TO THE FIXTURE OR TERMINAL AND TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE.

SUPPORT SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES BY AT LEAST TWO POSITIVE DEVICES WHICH

SURROUND THE CEILING RUNNER AND WHICH ARE EACH SUPPORTED FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE BY A 12 GA. WIRE. SPRING CLIPS OR CLAMPS THAT CONNECT ONLY TO THE RUNNER ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTS WHEN LIGHT FIXTURES ARE 8 FEET OR LONGER.

SUPPORT PENDANT MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES DIRECTLY FROM THE STRUCTURE ABOVE WITH

HANGER WIRES OR CABLES PASSING THROUGH EACH PENDANT HANGER AND CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING 4 TIMES THE WEIGHT OF THE FIXTURE. (SEE ALSO NOTE 10). SPECIAL DETAILS ARE NECESSARY FOR THIS CONDITION AT THE CEILING GRID.

LAY-IN CEILING ASSEMBLIES - SPLICES OR INTERSECTIONS OF LAY-IN CEILING ASSEMBLIES IN

EXITWAYS SHALL BE ATTACHED WITH THROUGH CONNECTORS SUCH AS POP RIVETS, SCREWS PINS, PLATES WITH END TABS OR OTHER APPROVED CONNECTORS. THIS INCLUDES LAY-IN OVER NURSE STATIONS IN CORRIDORS.

CEILING GRID CLASSIFICATION
-CEIILNG GRID IS HEAVY DUTY
-MFGR CATALOG NUMBER
MAIN RUNNER__________
CROSS RUNNER_________
-MFGR CATALOG NUMBER OF DETAIL FOR RUNNER SPLICE________

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

7. 8.

9. 10.

11. 12.

13. 14.

15. 16.
4'-0"
4'-0" *
NOTES:
1)* MAX. DISTANCE TO FIRST BRACING POINT.
2) PROVIDE COUNTER SLOPING WIRES FOR VERTICAL HANGER WIRES MORE THAN 1 IN 6 OUT-OF-PLUMB 3) ATTACH EA. VERT. WIRE TO SUPPORT ABV. & CEIL. SUSPENSION MEMBER W/MIN. OF 3 TIGHT TURNS IN 3"
4 ) SECURE DIAGONAL FRAMING WIRE TO MAIN RUNNERS WITH 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2" 5) SEE IR25-2.10 FOR ADDITIONAL CEILING INSTALLATION INFORMATION

FREE SIDE

FIXED SIDE

FREE SIDE

FIXED SIDE

LINE OF PERIMETER WALL
MAIN RUNNERS @ 4'-0" O.C.

CROSS RUNNER @ 2'-0" O.C.
12 GA. VERTICAL
HANGER WIRE @ 4'-0"
O.C. @ EA. MAIN
RUNNER
12 GA. PERIMETER

HANGER AT TERMINAL
END OF EA. MAIN

RUNNER & CROSS TEE
IN ROOMS EXCEEDING 1000 SF -
4 WAY 45° DIAGONAL 12 GA.

WIRE BRACING AND
COMPRESSION POST. ONE
EVERY 144 SF. MAX. (96 SF @
SCHOOLS & 96 SF @ ESSENTIAL
SERVICES BLDGS) BEGINNING @
4'-0" MAX. FROM PERIMETER
WALLS
12 GA. MIN. WIRE AT

OPPOSING CORNERS OF

LIGHT FIXTURE
TOS

GSM COUNTER FLASHING
W/ 3" MIN. FACE

TERMINATION BAR W/
FASTENERS @ 8" O.C.

CONT. SEALANT

CANT STRIP

BUILT UP ROOFING

BUILT UP ROOFING BASE

FLASHING
EXHAUST FAN, SMD.

SEE FOR

TRANSITION BETWEEN

NEW AND EXISTING

ROOFING
19 / A-602
SPRING ISOLATOR, SMD.

SEAL PENETRATIONS

THROUGH BUR PER

MANUFACTURER

RECOMMENDATION

PREFAB MTL CURB
PREFAB. MECHANICAL

EQUIPMENT CURB,

CONTINUOUS

SEALANT

GSM COUNTER FLASHING
W/ 3" MIN. FACE

TERMINATION BAR W/
FASTENERS @ 8" O.C.

CONT. SEALANT

RIGID INSULATION

W/COVER BOARD
GSM FLASHING W/ #10 SMS W/
WASHER @ 12" O.C.

CANT STRIP

BUILT UP ROOFING

BUILT UP ROOFING BASE FLASHING
(E) PLYWOOD SHEATHING
(E) JOIST

SOLARTUBE

SADDLE TIE TO MAIN
RUNNER W/ #18 WIRE
20 GA 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" CONT WALL
ANGLE

SOLARTUBE

SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC

TILE CEILING

SADDLE TIE TO MAIN
RUNNER W/ #18 WIRE
20 GA 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" CONT WALL
ANGLE

SOLARTUBE

SUSPENDED ACOUSTIC

TILE CEILING

SEE FOR TRANSITION

NEW NAD EXISTING ROOFING
19 / A-602
6" MIN.LAP6" MIN. LAP
(E) RIGID INSULATION
(E) ROOF MEMBRANE
(N) PT WD BLOCKING AT

TRANSITION BTWN (N) AND
(E)
(E) TRUSS
(N) BUR ASSEMBLY
(N) RIGID

INSULATION W/

COVERBOARD
(E) SHEATHING
TOS

LAP (N) BASE LAYER

UNDER BLOCKING AS
SHOWN
(N) ROOFING MEMBRANE LAP O/(E) AS SHOWN
16D TOENAIL @ 24" INTO (E)
TJL TOP CHORD, MIN. (2) PER

BLOCKING
PREFAB. MECHANICAL

EQUIPMENT CURB,

CONTINUOUS

SEALANT

GSM COUNTER FLASHING
W/ 3" MIN. FACE

TERMINATION BAR W/
FASTENERS @ 8" O.C.

CONT. SEALANT

RIGID INSULATION

W/COVER BOARD
GSM FLASHING W/ #10 SMS W/
WASHER @ 12" O.C.

CANT STRIP

BUILT UP ROOFING

BUILT UP ROOFING BASE FLASHING
(E) PLYWOOD SHEATHING
EXHUAST DUCT, SMD.

SEE FOR TRANSITION

NEW NAD EXISTING ROOFING
19 / A-602

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/27/2025 12:58:53 PM
23035.00

ROOF AND CEILING

DETAILS
A-602
03/28/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERSPACE PERMIT SET 03/28/2025
3" = 1'-0"7

RUNNERS
SPLICE
12" = 1'-0"2 SEISMIC BRACING DTL
3" = 1'-0"8 SLIP JT DETAIL
3" = 1'-0"6

SLIP JT

DIAGRAM
3" = 1'-0"9 TYP EDGE CONDITION
3" = 1'-0"10 TYP PERMETER
3" = 1'-0"14 TYP. GYP SOFFIT
3" = 1'-0"13 TYP. MTL PANEL SOFFIT
1 1/2" = 1'-0"12 OVERHEAD POWER CORD
3" = 1'-0"18 TYP. MTL PANEL SOFFIT @ WALL
3" = 1'-0"15 WOOD PORTAL SOFFIT
3" = 1'-0"17 PORTAL SOFFIT @ EXT. WINDOW
3" = 1'-0"3 TYP. CAN LIGHT FIXTURE
1/8" = 1'-0"5 TYP. SUSP. ACOUST. TILE CEILING
3" = 1'-0"20 EXHUAST FAN @ ROOF DETAIL
3" = 1'-0"21 SOLARTUBE
3" = 1'-0"19 ROOFING TIE IN
3" = 1'-0"16 DUCT PENETRATION
E:
03/28/2025
0 2
/
0 4
/
2 0
2 4
03/18/2025

E:
03/28/2025

9.l
January 12, 2026

Packet Pg. 1092

SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP
AND BACKSPLASH (U.O.N.)
3/4" PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE
1X3 CLEAT TOP AND BOTTOM
3/4 WOOD-VENEER PLYWOOD @

INTERIOR BOX RETURN BASE INTO

CABINET INTERIOR

SELF RIMMING SINK, SEE PLUMBING
DWGS., SEAL AROUND EDGE
CLEAR
9" MIN.

CLEAR
8" MIN.
4"
6 1/2" MAX.

DRAIN AND HOT WATER PIPE TO

BE INSULATED
3/4" WOOD-VENEER PLYWOOD DOOR

GARBAGE DISPOSAL SHOWN
DASHED COORD. INSTALLATION

W/ACCESSIBLE CLEARANCES

SHADED AREA DENOTES CLEAR

ACCESSIBLE SPACE
2'-3" MIN. CLEAR
(2'-10" MAX TO SINK RIM)
2'-10"
NOTE:

1. AREA UNDER SINK TO BE FREE OF

ALL SHARP OR ABRASIVE SURFACES,

ALL EDGES TO BE ROUNDED
3/4" WOOD-VENEER PLYWOOD SKIRT
4"

TOE CLEARANCE
1'-7" MIN./ 2'-1" MAX.

CLEAR
11" MIN.
2'-6"
A-651
10 DOOR PULL

CASEWORK COMPONENT

FLOORING PER FINISH SCHEDULE
8d NAIL @ 12" O.C.

BOLT & WASHER
3/8" DIA. EXP ANCHOR, 2 1/2" EMBED
4"
3"
16d NAIL @ 12" O.C.

RUBBER BASE AS SCHEDULED OR W.O.

CONT. 2x P.T. WOOD
2x4 CONT. P.T. WOOD SPACER
4"

CFCI WASTE

RECEPTACLE,

BASED ON

RUBBERMAID

RECEPTACLE
11" X 20" X 30"

DIMENSIONS
5/8"

PLYWOOD,

PAINTED

BLACK OVER
GWB

SQUARE AND

RECTANGLE

WASTE OPENINGS

LINED WITH ABS

EDGE BANDING,

COLOR TO MATCH

ROUND GROMMET
2"

RUBBER BASE
5/8" PLYWOOD

OVER GWB, TYP
4" 2'-4" MIN.
2'-10"
V.I.F.
3'-8" MIN.
2'-10" OVERALL
3'-0" TO CENTERLINE

CENTERLINE

OF WASTE

OPENING, TYP
4" 4"
4 1/2"
7 1/4" 1'-2 1/2" 1'-2 1/2" 7 1/4"
7 1/4"
WOOD
VENEER

CABINET
DOOR, WP-1
1/4" 1'-2 1/2" MIN. 1'-2 1/2" MIN. 1'-2 1/2" MIN. 1/4"
RB-1, TYP
1'-0"
2 1/2"
8"
8"
R 3"

ROUND WASTE

OPENINGS

LINED WITH

PLASTIC

GROMMET,

LIGHT GREY
2'-6"
A-651
10 1/4" WOOD-VENEER

PLYWOOD AT INTERIOR
3/4" VENEER PLYWOOD

ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
1" WOOD-VENEER PLYWOOD

DOOR WITH LOCK

AS INDICATED ON ELEVATIONS
1" WOOD-VENEER

PLYWOOD SIDES BOTTOM

AND TOP
2x P.T. WOOD BASE FRAME

CUT TO HEIGHT OF BASE

AS SCHEDULED
3'-4" OC

DOOR PULL

1x3 CLEAT TOP AND BOTTOM
1x3 CLEAT AT MIDPOINT

FASTEN TO BLOCKING -
TYP.

SHIM BASE AS REQ. TO
LEVEL
U.O.N.
2'-6"

PER INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
SHELF STANDARDS 2
EACH SIDE - TYP.

SIM
2X2X1/8 ANGLE X 2" LONG
@ 16" O.C. & 2" FROM EACH
END, TYP. MIN. (2) PER

CABINET
#10 X 5/8" FHWS
#12 TEK POINT,
STAGGERED @ 16" O.C.

SM-01 WRITABLE SURFACE

DIRECT APPLIED
MAX
45°
ALIGN
A-651
6 SOLID SURFACE

COUNTERTOP AND
BACKSPLASH (U.O.N.)
3/4" PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE
3/4" WOOD-VENEER
PLYWOOD - TYP.
3/4" WOOD-VENEER

PLYWOOD ADJUSTABLE
SHELF
SHELF STANDARDS 2 EACH
SIDE - TYP.
1X3 CLEAT TOP AND BOTTOM
2x P.T. WOOD BASE FRAME

CUT TO HEIGHT OF BASE AS

SCHEDULED
SHIM BASE AS REQ. TO LEVEL
3/4" WOOD-VENEER
PLYWOOD DOOR (U.O.N.)
3/4"
4"2'-10"
TYP.
4"
TYP.
4"
U.O.N.
2'-6"
A-651
6 A-651
10 DOOR PULL

BACKING PLATE AS SCHEDULED

COUNTERTOP AND BACKSPLASH
(2) #12 TEK POINT,
STAGGERED @ 16" O.C.
1x3 WOOD CLEAT
3/4"
SOLID WOOD EDGE BAND, TYP.@

ALL EXPOSED PLYWOOD EDGES
1/8" CHAMFER

DOOR/DRAWER

AS OCCURS
U.O.N.
4"

SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

AS NOTED
3/4" WOOD-VENEER PLYWOOD

ADJUSTABLE SHELF
1X3 CLEAT TOP AND BOTTOM
LOCKABLE 3/4" WOOD-VENEER

PLYWOOD DOOR
1/4" WOOD VENEER

PLYWOOD ON INTERIOR
1'-0" TYP.
1/2"

PER INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
SHELF STANDARDS 2 EACH
SIDE - TYP.
2X2X1/8 ANGLE X 2" LONG @ 16" O.C.
& 2" FROM EACH END, TYP. MIN. (2)

PER CABINET
2'-0"

CABINET PULL
2'-10"

DRAWER WOOD

CONSTRUCTION

HANGING FILE DRAWER

WOOD CONSTRUCTION

SOLID SURFACE

COUNTERTOP AND
BACKSPLASH (U.O.N.)
3/4" PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE
3/4" WOOD-VENEER
PLYWOOD - TYP.
1X3 CLEAT TOP AND BOTTOM
2x P.T. WOOD BASE FRAME

CUT TO HEIGHT OF BASE AS

SCHEDULED
3/4" WOOD-VENEER
PLYWOOD DOOR (U.O.N.)
A-651
6 A-651
10 FIZFELT ARO PLANK 1

AK, SEE

WD VENEER BENCH
PTD TO MATCH PT-01

UPHOLSTERED

CUSHIONS AT SEAT
U.O.N.
2'-6"
8 / A-901
1/2"
A-651
6 3/4" WD VENEER
DOOR

CABINET PULL
(E) WALL ASSEMBLY
T-AA
16 A-651

B-C B-D B-AA
12 A-651
7 A-651
3 A-651
B-BB
3 A-651
14 A-651
W-AA

LICENSED ARCHITECT

STATE OF CALIFORNIA

PAULINE SOUZA
NO. C24532
REN. 8/31/25
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
5 4

SAN FRAN CI S C O
CALIFORNIA 94107
415. 489.2 224 TEL
415.358.91 00 FAX
WWW W. RNSSTUDIO. OC M
01 SECOND STREET
TH LF ORO STE., 402
SHEET NO:

SHEET TITLE:

DATEISSUES
PROJECT NO.:

DATE:

SCALE:

All drawings and written material appearing herein constitute original and unpublished work of the Architect/Engineer and may not be duplicated, used or disclosed without consent of Architect/Engineer.

If this drawing is not 30"x42", then the drawing has been revised from its original size.

Noted scales must be adjusted. This line should be equal to one inch

KEYPLAN
REVISION LIST# DATE
As indicated
3/18/2025 9:54:15 AM
23035.00

STANDARD CASEWORK

SCHEDULE, DETAILS
A-651
03/18/2025
San Carlos Library
610 ELM ST. SAN CARLOS, CALIFORNIA 94070
MAKERS SPACE PERMIT SET 03/18/2025
1 1/2" = 1'-0"2 ACC SINK
3" = 1'-0"6 BASE ANCHOR TO FLOOR
1 1/2" = 1'-0"12 BUILT IN WASTE RECEPTICLE
1 1/2" = 1'-0"3 TYP. BASE CABINET
1 1/2" = 1'-0"16 TYP. TALL CABINET
3" = 1'-0"10 WALL PLATE AND EDGE DTL